West and advancing a little towards the South So that St. Anthony and Brava make the two Ends or Points towards the West Bona Vista makes the middle of the half Circle towards the East SANCTA LVCIA St. Nicholas St. NICHOLAS and St. JAGO are the greatest having each 100 or 120000 paces of length 15 20 or 30000 of breadth and 200 or 250000 paces of circuit St. Anthonio and St. Vincent are less by more then half and not of above 100000 paces in circuit the rest which are the least have not above 30 40 or 50000 paces I make no account of seven or eight others whose names have not been given us and which are rather Rocks than Isles St. JAGO is the greatest and the chief of all having a Bishops seat in the City of the same name St. Jago besides which are Ribera Grande with a good Port towards the West Praya towards the East St. Mary towards the North all with their Ports Some place likewise St. Thomas whose Port is dangerous others St. Domingo others St. Michael possibly these fall under some of the others Ribera Grande hath 500 Houses the Air is unhealthful the Land hilly but the Valleys fruitful in Grains Vines Fruits Sugar Canes Millons c. Feeding much Fowl and Cattle and particularly Goats in abundance These Beasts bringing forth young every four Moneths and three of four at a time and the Kids are very fat and delicate Sancta Lucia St. Vincent St. Anthony SANCTA LVCIA is the best peopled after that of St. Jago St. Nicholas St. Vincent and St. Anthony have been esteemed Desert yet they appear to have many Inhabitants though not so many as they could feed The Ships of the Vnited Provinces passing here in 1622. found in that of St Anthony 500 persons Men Women and Children all Aethiopians St. Vincent and St. Nicholas had no less At Mayo these Aethiopians are strong and of good stature but it is to be believed that every where are some Portugals to keep the rest in aw Salt Bona Vista The Isles of SALT of BONA VISTA of MAYO and of St. JAGO yield so great quantity of Salt which is made naturally of the Water which the Sea from time to time leaves that besides what they consume in the Countrey they laded every year more then 100 Ships which is transported into other Countreys and yet there remains six times as much which becomes useless It is reported that the Isle of Mayo could make alone lading for two thousand Sail of Ships yearly and the others not much less The other riches of the Countrey lies in the Skins of their Goats which are in so great quantity through all these Isles that many flocks are seen of 1000 Head The Skins are sent to Brasil Portugal and other places and make excellent Cordovants The Flesh is salted in the Countrey and sold to Ships going and returning from Brasil to the Indies Besides the Salt and Woats which are the principal riches of the Countrey they have many Wild Horses Oxen Apes c. also Cotton whereof they make several Manufactures Also Rice and many sorts of Grains Among their Fowl they have one kind particular to them which they call Flamencos the Feathers of their Bodies are all White and those of their Wings Red as Blood Their Tortoises are not above two or three foot long they come out of the Sea and lay their Eggs in the night covering them with Sand and the heat of the Sun hatches them Fuego Brava In Fuego and Brava they gather Wines which yield little to those of the Canaries The Sargasso Sea Between the Islands of Cape Verde and the main Land inclining towards the Canaries the Sea is called Sargasso because from the 20 to the 24 degree and for the length of 30 40 or 50 Leagues the Sea is covered with an herb like to that which is found in the bottom of Wells and which the Portugals call Sargasso This Herb except that it is more Yellow resembles Sea-Parsley bearing certain Grains or Fruit at the end but of neither taste nor substance Many have been much troubled to know from whence these Weeds come which are distant from the Isles and from the firm Land more then 60 Leagues and in a part of the Sea where there is no bottom found Nevertheless they are so close and in so great quantity that the Water seems rather a Meadow or Green Field then a Sea Ships which fall among these Weeds had need of a good Wind to disingage themselves and I believe it was these which hindred Sataspes from finishing his course about Africa and were the cause of his misfortune This Sataspes Son of Teaspes one of the Achemenides A story of Sataspes having ravished the Daughter of Zopyrus the Son of Magabises was condemned by Xerxes to be crucified His Mother the Sister of Darius caused this punishment to be changed into another to wit he was caused to make the Circumnavigation of Africa which could not be done without great difficulty and hazard He embarked in Egypt passed the Pillars of Hercules entred into the Occidental Ocean and passed far to the South along Africa but knowing that it would yet require much time and pains to end this course he returned into Egypt and thence to the Court where he said he had met with somewhat that hindred his Ship from passing farther Xerxes took him for a liar and made him suffer the death he was before condemned to But to continue The Isles of Cape Verde The Position wherein the Isles of Cape Verde are now found answers much better to the Position of the Fortunate Isles of Ptolomy then that of the Canaries Ptolomy places his Fortunate Isles between the 10 and 16 degree of Latitude the Isles of Cape Verde are between the 13 and 19 the Canaries beyond the 26. The Meridian of the Fortunate Isles of Ptolomy is at 8 degrees of Longitude from the Coast of Africa and towards the West The least Meridian of the Isles of Cape Verde is at 8 degrees of Longitude from the same Coast and towards the same side The least Meridian of the Canaries touches the Coast of Africa Ptolomy confines his Fortunate Isles under one Meridian and extends them from South to North between the tenth to the sixteenth parallel or degrees of Latitude which are five degrees of Latitude The Isles of Cape Verde are not justly under one Meridian but under two or three and extend themselves from the 13 ½ to the 19 which are five degrees of Latitude The Canaries on the contrary are all couched from West to East and almost under the same parallel or degree of Latitude which is the 27 lengthning themselves from the first to the 6 of Longitude These four Reasons are very strong to prove that the Isles of Cape Verde do rather answer to the Fortunate Isles of Ptolomy then the Canaries Their distance in regard of the Aequator is
many places but in some in greater quantity than in others Serpents on the Coast of Malabar On the Coast of Malabar and at Cambaja Serpents are discovered on the superficies of the water this is a sign to Sea-men that they are near to those Regions About four miles from New Spain many Roots Bulrushes and Leaves like unto Fig-leaves float on the water which they eat and are in tast like unto Coleworts In the description of the first Navigation of the Dutch unto the Streights of Magellan we read that on the 12th of January in Anno 1599. the water of the Ocean not far from the Silver-River or Rio de laplata in Brasil appeared of a red and bloody colour but being drawn up in a bucket or the like when that they had more throughly viewed it they found that an innumerable multitude of Worms of a red colour were contained in that water and being taken up in the hand they leaped like unto Fleas And these Seamen call Sea-fleas and they are supposed to come from an innumerable company of small Crabs which being found on the South Continent fill the Sea Here is no place to treat of the Animals of which there are various kinds in divers places of the Sea Proposition XVII Why the Sea in the Night season seemeth to glitter especially if that the Waves be raised the more vehemently by the Winds The Sea in the Night seemeth to glitter or shine This question requireth the knowledge of that difficulty concerning the causes of Colours Divers are the resolutions of Philosophers concerning them but as for the explication of the proposed phenomenon or Question that Opinion seemeth the most commodious which sheweth how Colours do exist or rather appear from a certain and various motion but we leave the accurate explication of the same to Naturalists Proposition XVIII The Ocean or rather all Water casteth out Terrestrial Bodies on the shoar especially in the Full Moon Terrestrial bodies are cast out of the Ocean on the Shore It is not difficult to render an account of this property which Experience sufficiently testifieth For Water is never without some motion which if it be swift and towards one quarter it carrieth Terrestrial bodies with it until it meeteth with the shoar where by reason of the ceasing vigour of the motion of the water those Terrestrial bodies are laid down but in the Ocean the Waves are carried hither and thither By these the Terrestrial bodies are carried after the same mode and because that all Waves tend to some coast of Land therefore all Terrestrial bodies are carried towards the shoar In the Full Moons is the greatest motion of the Ocean therefore vain is their Opinion who believed the Ocean to be an Animal and to have sense by which it purgeth it self from all dregs Terrestrial bodies but here the cause is sufficiently manifest CHAP. XIV Of the Motions of the Sea in general and in particular of the Flux and Reflux Proposition I. Water hath no natural Motion except one by which it moveth from a more higher place unto these that are more low but if the vicine place or body be equal or of a greater Altitude than the superficies of the Water then the Water naturally resteth that is it is not moved except that it be compelled by a violent cause Water hath no natural motion except one THe truth of this Proposition is manifest from Vulgar experience for if that a vessel containing water be moved the water so long fluctuateth in it until no part be higher than the other that is until they compose a Spherical figure or superficies as we have said in the Thirteenth Chapter For although this Motion hath a violent cause viz. the motion of the Air about the Earth yet because that there is a great question concerning this cause and it is so manifest in the water that it seemeth not to come unto it from an external cause so for to distinguish this motion of the water from other motions we term it Natural Now this motion is unto that quarter unto which the place more depressed is scituated Proposition II. When part of the Ocean is moved the whole Ocean is moved or all the other parts of it are also moved but by so much the more that every one is nearer the part moved For because that if part of the Ocean be moved it doth necessarily change place and therefore this place is more low than the place of the vicine water this nearer water shall be moved into this place and the vicine water of that into the place of that and so forward in the other parts But there is lesser motion in the places of the more remote parts Proposition III. To observe the quarter into which the Sea that is moved tendeth The quarter into which the Sea that is moved tendeth Chuse a time if you can when no violent Wind bloweth and cast into the Water a body almost of the same gravity with the water let the place be observed where it was cast in to wit let the Boat remain there immovable then when that this body is carried by the Sea a moderate space from the place where it was cast in then let another Boat be placed of that and let the quarter be observed into which the scituation of this second Boat vergeth from the former For this also shall be the quarter in which we say that the Sea at that time is moved Proposition IV. The Motion of the Sea is either direct or a Vortex or a Concussion I call that direct which tendeth unto some quarter a Vortex when the water moveth into a round and is in some part rejected a concussion when it trembleth But laying aside the two latter unto the end of the Chapter we shall treat of the direct motion and therefore we shall call this by a general term the Motion of the Sea Proposition V. Of the Motions which we find in the Sea some are general some proper and singular other some contingent General proper and singular motions of the Sea I call that General which is found almost in all the parts of the Ocean and that at all times I call those proper and special motions by which only some parts of the Ocean are moved and they are twofold perpetual and anniversary the former are those which persist without mutation or cessation the other which are found at certain months or days of the year in some certain Sea I call those motions of the Sea contingent which without any certain order sometimes do cease and other some begin such are infinite Proposition VI. Wind is the cause of the contingent motion of the Sea forcing the Sea to a quarter opposit to the Wind neither is the Sea ever free from such motions Wind is the cause of the motion of the Sea For seeing that the Air toucheth the Sea and the Wind is nothing else but a strong commotion of
Saturdays Maxfield Maxfield or Macclesfield seated near a Forest so called a very fair and large Town graced with a goodly Church which hath a high Spire Steeple adjoyning to which is a Colledge The Inhabitants drive a great Trade in making of Buttons and its Market which is on Mondays is well served with Corn Provisions c. Cornwal described CORNWAL encompassed on all parts except on the East by Devonshire with the Sea which thrusts forth its several Arms and receives those many Rivers which plentifully water the County as the Foy Newton Dranes Lo âânla Seaton Loo Liner Tavy and Tamer It is of a sharp but healthful Air generally very Hilly consisting ordinarily of Rocks and Shelves but crusted over with a shallow Earth and more inolined to sterility than sertility but the parts towards the Sea and the enclosures about the Towns through the industry of the Husbandman are more sertil bearing good crops and feeding store of Cattle It affordeth great store of game both for the Hawk and Hound and its Seas and Rivers plenty of several sorts of Fish and Fowl as well those common to other Counties as appropriate to themselves In the bowels of the Earth are Quarries of sundry sorts of useful Stones and Slates for building also Copper precious Stones called Cornish Diamonds but chiefly Tin which is here found in great plenty to the great inrichment of the Inhabitants who as to their Names and Language hold great affinity with the Welsh The ancient Inhabitants were known to the Romans by the name of the Danmonti's and became afterwards part of the Kingdom of the West Saxons This County is severed into 9 Hundreds in which are numbred 161 Parish Churches and hath intercourse of Traffick with 23 Market Towns Launston seated on an eminency and on a branch of the Tamer Launston a large Town Corporate governed by a Major and his Brethren and amongst other Immunities electeth Parliament men 't is a place well inhabited enjoyeth a good Trade and the more as being the place where the Assizes are held and it 's Market which is on Saturdays is well served with Provisions Adâoyning to this Town is an ancient Castle seated on a great eminency and encompassed at the top with a treble Wall where there was a Colledge of Canons and Secular Priests The lower part now compriseth a decayed Chappel a large Hall and a place made use of for the Common Goal Liskerd a Town Corporate governed by a Major 8 Magistrates Liskerd a Recorder and other sub-Officers electeth Parliament men hath an eminent Free School and is a large well inhabited and frequented Town whose Market on Saturdays is well served with Corn and all sorts of Provisions and the Inhabitants drive a considerable trade for Tarn every Market-day Bodman seated in a bottom between two high Hills Bodman which render it not very healthful especially to new Comers it is large an indifferent well built and inhabited Town Corporate governed by a Major sendeth Burgesses to Parliament and hath a great Market on Saturdays for Corn and Provisions Listhyel or Listwithiel seated on the Foy not far from its fall into Foyhaven Listhyel which formerly brought up Vessels to the Town but its Channel being choaked up by reason of the Tin-Mines is a great obstruction to its Trade It is a Town Corporate governed by a Major and his Brethren electeth Parliament men hath its part in the coynage of the Tin but the Goal for the whole Stannery and the keeping of the Courts is only here kept and hath a small Market on Fridays Foy so called from its Haven or Arm of the Sea on which it is seated Foy being strongly fortified at the entrance of the Haven with Block-houses and in times past was a place very considerable for Shipping and Traffick its Market which is on Saturdays is very served with Corn and Provisions West-Looe seated on a navigable Creek over which it hath a fair Bridge West-Loot which leadeth to East-Looe more commodiously seated where there is an indifferent good Market on Saturdays They are both Towns Corporate and send Burgesses to Parliament The chief benefit arising to the Inhabitants of these Towns is their Fishing Saltash seated on the descent of a steep Hill a pretty large Town Corporate Saltash consisting of 3 Streets is governed by a Major and 9 Aldermen enjoyeth large Immunities and sendeth Burgesses to Parliament It s Market is on Saturdays which of late is much decaied to what it was ãâ¦ã âoditoâ yet its Inhabitants gain well by their Mault and good Beer Not far from this Town is Trematon Castle once a place of great note in which is kept the Trematon Court wherein all Causes within âhe said Fee are tried as also the Prison Padstow Padstow a Sea-Port Town of some Trade by reason of its commodious scituation with Ireland and were its Haven secure it would be of greater account It is a Borough Town electing Parliament men and hath a good Market for Corn and Provisions on Saturdays Falmouth Falmouth at present a very large and well inhabited Town Corporate governed by Major and sub Officers enjoyeth a good Trade is well resorted unto by Shipping where there is a Key intended shortly to be built and hath a very considerable Market for Corn and Provisions on Thursdays The Haven whereon this Town is seated and beareth its name is very commodious for Ships and so capacious that 100 Sail of Ships may safely ride at Anchor And this Haven with those of Milford and Plimouth are the chiefest in the Kingdom On the West side and at the very entrance of this Haven is Pendennis Castle seated on a Hill so called and on the other side but of a lower scituation is St. Moze or Maudit both which are a great security to the Coast and Haven Truro Truro seated on a branch of Falmouth haven at present the head Town in the County being a fair large well inhabited and traded Borough Town priviledged with a Majoralty sendeth Burgesses to Parliament hath the coynage of the Tin is a place where the Western Sessions are held and its Markets on Wednesdays and Saturdays are well served with Provision c. Penrin Penrin seated also on a Creek of Falmouth-haven a very considerable Toâen Corporate electing Parliament men and hath weekly 3 Markets viz. on Wednesdays Fridays and Saturdays for Corn and on Saturdays for Provision Helston Helston seated on the Lowe between which and the Sea there is a great breach or bar of Sand. It is a well inhabited and frequented Town Corporate governed by a Major and Aldermen electeth Parliament men and its Market on Saturdays is well served with Provisions and the two Markets before Christmas are so great that they may be reckoned as Fairs Near this Town is Godolphin-Hill well known for its rich Tin Mines Penzance Penzance seated on Monts-bay and in an
Moon from the Earth It is worthy observation that the half Diameter of the Earth is the measure of all Celestial dimensions as well in assigning the distances of the Planets from the Earth and from themselves as in numbring and computing their magnitude So we say that the Sun is distant from the Earth ubout 1200 half Diameters the Moon 40 c. But seeing in Geography we do not only consider the great Circles of the Earth as the Equator c. but also the Parallels of the Equator Therefore we must likewise determine how many miles or perches answer one degree in every Parallel We have taken the accounting of the Perches out of Snellius but I my self have reckoned up the miles to wit 1900 Perches for a German mile 1500 for a Belgick or Holland mile 475 for an Italian mile A TABLE of the Quantity of one Degree in every Parallel The Degrees in which the Parallels are distant from the Equator or the Elevation of the Poles of the Parallels Equator of the Perch of one degree Holland miles German Italian The Latitude Of a Perch of one degree Holland miles German Italian   mil. per. miles min. miles min.   mil. per. miles min. miles min.  28500 19 0 15. 0 60. 0         1 28496 18. 1496 14. 59 59. 56 46 19798 13. 298 10. 25 41. 40 2 28483 18. 1483 14. 59 59. 55 47 19437 13. 0 â0 14 41. 0 3 â8461 18. 1461 14. 58 59. 52 48 19070 12. 1070 10. 2 40. 8 4 28431 18. 1431 14. 57 59. 50 49 18698 12. 698 9. 50 39. 20 5 28392 18. 1392 14. 56 59. 46 50 18319 12. 319 9. 38 38. 32 6 28344 18. 1344 14. 55 59. 40 51 17936 11. 1436 9. 26 37. 44 7 28288 18. 1288 14. 53 59. 37 52 17546 11. 1046 9. 14 37. 0 8 28223 18. 1223 14. 51 59. 24 53 17152 11. 652 9. 2 36. 8 9 28149 18. 1149 14. 48 59. 12 54 16752 11. 252 8. 49 35. 26 10 28067 18. 1067 14. 46 59. 4 55 16347 10. 1347 8. 36 34. 24 11 27976 18. 976 14. 43 58. 52 56 15932 10. 937 8. 23 33. 32 12 27877 18. 877 14. 40 58. 40 57 15522 10. 522 8. 10 32. 40 13 27769 18. 769 14. 37 58. 28 58 15103 10. 103 7. 57 31. 40 14 27653 18. 653 14. 33 58. 12 59 14671 9. 1179 7. 44 31. 0 15 27529 18. 529 14. 29 50.  60 14250 9. 750 7. 30 30. 0 16 27653 18. 453 14. 25 57. 40 61 13817 9. 317 7. 16 29. 4 17 27255 18. 255 14. 21 57. 20 62 13380 8. 1380 7. 2 28. 8 18 27105 18. 105 14. 16 57. 4 63 12939 8. 939 6. 48 27. 12 19 26947 18. 0 14. 11 56. 44 64 12494 8. 994 6. 34 26. 16 20 26781 18. 0 14. 6 56. 24 65 12045 8. 45 6. 20 25. 20 21 26607 17. 1107 14. 0 56. 0 66 11592 7. 1092 6. 6 24. 24. 22 26423 17. 925 13. 54 55. 36 67 11136 7. 636 5. 52 23. 28 23 26234 17. 734 â3 48 55. 12 68 10676 7. 176 5. 38 22. 32 24 26036 17. 536 â3 42 54. 48 69 10213 6. 1213 5. 23 21. 32 25 25830 17. 330 â3 36 54. 24 70 9748 6. 748 5. 8 20 32 26 25616 17. 116 13. 29 54. 0 71 9279 6. 279 4. 53 19. 32 27 25394 16. 1394 13. 22 53. 28 72 8807 5. 1307 4. 38 18. 32 28 25164 16. 1164 13. 15 53. 0 73 8333 5. 933 4. 23 17. 32 29 24927 16. 927 13. 7 52. 28 74 7846 5. 346 4. 8 16. 32 30 â4681 16. 681 13. 59 51. 56 75 7376 4. 1376 3. 53 15. 32 31 24429 10. 429 12. 51 51. 24 76 6895 4. 895 3. 38 14 32 32 24169 16. 169 12. 43 50. 52 77 6411 4. 411 3. 23 13. 32 33 23902 15. 1402 12. 35 50. 20 78 5925 3. 1425 3. 8 12. 32 34 23628 15. 1128 12. 26 49. 44 79 5438 3. 938 2. 52 11. 28 35 23346 15. 846 12. 17 49. 8 80 4949 3. 449 2. 36 10. 24 36 23057 15. 557 12. 8 48. 32 81 4458 2. 1458 2. 20 9. 20 37 22761 15. 261 11. 59 47. 56 82 3966 2. 966 2. 5 8. 20 38 22458 15. 0 11. 49 47. 16 83 3473 2. 473 1. 50 7. 20 39 22149 14. 1149 11. 39 46. 36 84 2979 1. 1479 1. 34 6. 12 40 21832 14. 832 11. 29 46. 0 85 2484 1. 984 1. 18 5. 12 41 21509 14. 509 11. 19 45. 16 86 1988 1. 488 1. 3 4. 12 42 21180 14. 180 11. 9 44. 36 82 1492 0. 1492 0. 47 3. 12 43 20843 13. 1343 10. 58 43. 52 88 995 0. 995 0. 31 2. 4 44 20501 13. 1001 10. 47 43. 8 89 497 0. 497 0. 16 1. 4 45 20152 13. 652 10. 36 42. 24 90 0 0. 0 0. 0 0. 0 CHAP. V. The Pythagorical motion of the Earth is the cause of many Celestial appearances THE Pythagorical motion or turning the Earth about as with a wheel not that quaking and shaking is the cause of very many Celestial appearances according to the Copernicans opinion seeing that without it every place would have a perpetual constancie of these But indeed there is no property or quality of the Earth concerning which there can be greater disputations fith that not very long ago it hath suffered the Censure of the Church of Rome Yet because to many men it seemeth likely to be true that such a motion of the Earth may be given therefore I will endeavour briefly to unfold the same The Motion of the Sun Moon and Stars and their appearances It is not unknown to any of the very Vulgar sort that the Sun Moon and all the Stars of Heaven appear every day that is in the space of 24 hours to be moved from East to West and commonly to return to the same places of Heaven It must therefore needs be that either they are really moved or that we are moved and that our motion or moving be imputed to the Stars For if two things change their dâstance one of them at least was moved which principle is most manifest The opinion of the Ptolomaians and Pythagoreans concerning the motion of the Stars c. That the Earth standeth still and that the Stars with the Heavens are moved was and is yet the common opinion of Astronomers which are called Ptolomaians or of such as follow the Doctrine of Ptolomy yet the Pythagoreans long ago maintained that the Stars held their place constantly without budging from thence and that the Earth was rouled and wheeled about its Center one of whom was the famous Aristarchus of Samos who for his defending this Opinion was by his Adversary accused of prophaning and violating Religion before the most famous and severe Bench of the Areopagites but he was nevertheless quitted by the sentence of those
most sincere Judges Yet this Opinion found but few Abettors insomuch that many Ages it was as it were buried in oblivion so that there was no mention in Schools made thereof until such time that eminent Astronomer Copernicus some two or three Ages past made it famous and so prevailed therein The opinion of Copernicus therein that very many excellent Astronomers imbraced this Opinion and confirmed it with sundry Arguments and Reasons among whom not long since flourished Kepler the Emperour's profest Mathematician and Galilaeus of Galilee the Italian Mathematician to the grand Duke of Tuscany or Florence and Lanthergius Belga And because there is a twofold motion of the heavenly Bodies perceived by us the first whereof is whereby all the Stars as well fixed âs Planets seem with equal time to wit in 24 hours to be carried round aboât the Earth and to rise and keep their southing and setting The second motion is that which is called proper whereby the Planets are observed with a different or diverse motion as also are the fixed Stars to be carried from West to East The Ptolomaians aââirm that both these motions are in the Stars themselves or their Orbs But the Copernicans ascribe that first motion not to the carrying about of the Earth only from one place to another but to the wheeling and turning about of it remaining in her own place about her own Axil from West to East such as is seen to be implanted in all the Stars yet they acquit the fixed Stars as also the Sun from the aforesaid second motion and attribute the apparent motion of these to the carrying of the Earth about the Sun and to the inclination of the Axil notwithstanding they leave the said second motion to the rest of the Planets Forsooth they deny the Sun to be a Planet but place the Earth in his stead and they prefer the Sun into the Ptolomaian place of the Earth to wit the Center of the whole World forasmuch as that is the cause which maketh the Earth Saturn Jupiter Mars Venus and Mercury to turn round about These are the Reasons of this Opinion Of the great number of the Stars which seem to perform their circuit in 24 hours 1. Because so great is the number of the Stars which seem to perform their Circuit in 24 hours about the Earth and this appearance may be declared by the motion of the Earth only remaining in her place therefore it is more agreeable to reason to determine this motion rather then that insomuch as when we sit in a Ship and sayling nearer to a Station or Harbour of many Ships which in the mean while seem as it were to approach or sayl to us yet we do not ascribe a motion or sayling to them And seeing nature doth in no case work by many things that which she can perform with a few it is likely in this business also that that is so observed and kept by her Of the swift motion of the Stars c. 2. Because the swiftness of that motion of the Stars would be incredible and such as would surpass all our imagination for seeing that they are distant from the Earth almost an infinite space and that most vast circuit ought to be run in one minute of an hour at least that they should be carried through 100000 miles Contrariwise if this motion should be ascribed to the Earth she remains still in her place neither need we to fear the least swiftness because she is turned about her own Axil as a Wheel The vastness of the Celestial Bodies compared with the body of the Earth 3. There accrues a greater force to this Argument if we compare the huge vastness of the Celestial Bodies with the Body of the Earth for seeing that the Sun at least is 200 times bigger then the Earth but the fixed Stars are in a manner 1000 times bigger to what man can it not be made more probable that the Earth is turned about its own Axil by a natural motion than that so huge Celestial Bodies should be moved from place to place Of the solidity of the Celestial Orbs according to Tycho Brahe 4. Because all the most famous Astronomers being compelled with Tycho Brahe by the appearances of the Stars c. do now deny that the Celestial Orbs are solid and hard which appearances the ancients used for proving the more easie supposition of the motion of the Stars therefore the carrying or wheeling of them about the Earth seemeth more incredible Yea they deny the Orbs to be solid because if these were so a mutual penetration of the Orbs must needs be granted seeing that some Planets are found frequently in the Sphere of some other No reason for the motion of the Stars about the Earth 5. No reason can be given why the Stars can be moved about the Earth when as contrariwise there may some reason be given why the Earth and the rest of the Planets may be moved about the Sun Of the Pole and Axil 6. Neither is the Pole nor Axil real about which the Stars are determined to be moved contrariwise in the Earth there is both Pole and Axil The sayling of Ships from West to East more easie than from East to West 7. Because the sayling of Ships from West to East is more easie than from East to West For out of Europe into the Indies they sayl in about four months when as in their return home it is about six months And this is because in their Voyage thither they are carried or moved into the same point with the Earth but in their return they are moved or carried into the contrary From the moving of the Earth the Celestial appearances c. may be declared 8. Because all the Celestial appearances the rising and setting of the Stars the increase or lengthning of the days c. may be evidently declared if we maintain the Earth to be moved But most especially the commodiousness and necessity of this Hypothesis is seen in those admirable properties of the Planets to explicate which the Ptolomaicks are compelled to invent many Circles Epicycles and Eccentricks without any reason But the Copernicans do so derive them from the second motion of the Earth about the Sun with easie labour insomuch that thereby they can make the cause of them manifest and so easie that the very unlearned may understand them to wit first why the Planets may seem sometimes to be retrograde or go backwards and indeed Saturn oftner and longer than Jupiter Jupiter than Mars c. sometimes to be carried with a swifter motion and sometimes to be stationary 2ly Why Venus and Mercury can never the whole night long be seen 3ly Why Venus can never depart any greater distance from the Sun than â0 degrees but Mercury no greater then thirty degrees and therefore those two Planets can never be seen to be opposite to the Sun Fourthly why Venus in the evening
of Mars Jupiter Saturn and the fixed Stars is altogether uncertain by reason of the defect of the parallaxy or mutual changing In the Copernicans Hypothesis the distance is varied not only from the motion of the Planets but also from the motion of the Earth it self The Reasons of either Opinion to wit of the Ptolomean and Copernican concerning the place of the Earth are almost the same with them which in the precedent Chapter we have alledged for this disputation hath great affinity with the same For if you ascribe and allow the second motion to the Sun which is called the proper motion not the Sun but the Earth shall be in the midst but if you allow that second Motion to the Earth not the Earth but the Sun shall be in the middle These Arguments following may be said for the Copernicans Opinion The Sun not only the fountain of Light but also the vital Spirit of the whole Universe 1. The Sun is not only the Fountain of Light which as a most clear shining torch illuminates the Earth Moon Venus and without doubt the rest of the Planets but he is the fire-hearth of heat and vital spirit by which this whole Universe seemeth to be cherished and sustained Therefore it is probable that he holdeth the middle place and that these are moved round about him 2. It is more likely that the Earth should be moved about the Sun that together with the rest of the Planets she may receive light and heat from him The Sun a vast body c. 3. The Sun being placed in the midst some cause is rendred why the rest of the Planets and the Earth may be carried round about him to wit because the Sun is a most vast body and endowed with great vertues and forces therefore he rowleth and stirreth up the rest of the Planets to their motion And this Reason especially taketh place if we admit Keplers Hypothesis concerning the motion of the Planets Spots in the Sun 4. The Observations of Galilaeus and Scheiner concerning the spots in the Sun prove that the Sun is moved about his Axil In the same manner therefore the rest of the Planets have their cause of going about neither seems it consistent with reason that any other should be attributed to him 5. If we allow the Earth a place between Mars and Venus and allow the Center to the Sun the motion of every Planet fittingly answers and agrees to the distance from the Center which in the Ptolomaick Supposition is manifest not to be effected by the consideration of the motions of the Sun Venus and Mercury 6. Those Celestial appearances which we have used in the former Chapter for the proving the second Motion of the Earth are also valid and efficacious for this place which I have said must be assigned to the Earth to wit the Retrograde course and station of the Planets and the admirable apparent motions of Venus and Mercury c. For indeed that second motion of the Earth doth before hand suppose this place and placing of the Earth or hath it joyned to it self very nearly But this Argument in my Opinion is the chiefest Yet for the first motion of the Earth nothing can be fetcht by way of Argument for gathering thence the situation of the Earth For the Earth might be in the Center of the World if she were without or wanted the second motion as Origanus also determines 7. So also the variation of the distance of the Planets from the Earth is well declared The Aristotelians and Platonists Arguments about the Earth Yet notwithstanding the Aristotelians and Platonists oppugn the Pythagoreans Opinion with many Arguments and endeavour to challenge the Center of the Earth for a place by these Arguments First heavy things are carried to the Center of the World but the Earth is the heaviest body therefore it takes up that Center Secondly heavy things would go from the Earth towards the Center of the Universe unless this Center were in the Earth Thirdly the Center is the ignoblest place and the Earth also is the vilest part of this Universe therefore it shall have the Center thereof Fourthly if the Earth were without the Center of the World and motion of the Stars then the Stars and Constellations would be seen in some seasons of the year and some days bigger than in others Fifthly neither would the middle part of Heaven always be conspicuous as Taurus rising the Scorpion should set c. Sixthly neither would there be Equinoxes Seventhly neither the Moon rising eclipsed would the Sun set c. Eightly neither would the number of Miles in the Earth equally answer every degree in Heaven The aforesaid Reasons of the Aristotelians refuted by the Copernicans The Copernicans do easily weaken these Reasons of the Aristotelians For the first and second is refell'd because the motion of heavy things is not to the Center of the Vniverse but to the homogeneal body as is proved by the parts of the Moon the Sun and Loadstone The third Reason taketh a false major and minor proposition For the Center is also a noble place and the Earth is not ignoble or base The other Reasons are easily disproved by Diagrams or Descriptions this at least being fore-supposed that the distance of the Earth from the Sun or Center how great soever it be yet if it be compared with the distance of the fixed Stars from the Sun it would be so little as that it would have no proportion to it The distance of the Moon Venus and Mercury from the Earth not so great as of Mars Jupiter and Saturn Moreover the Explication of the Theorem belongeth to this place that the distance of the fixed Stars and superiour Planets Mars Jupiter and Saturn is so great from the Earth that the half Diameter of the Earth hath no proportion to it but the distance of the Moon Venus and Mercury is not so great touching the Sun there is as yet a doubt surely if there be any proportion of the half Diameter of the Earth to the distance of the Earth from the Sun that will be very small But the Theorem is proved thus First the fixed Stars and higher Planets appear to us to rise at the same moment at which they would appear to rise by a right contrived supputation and calculation if we were set in the Center of the Earth Therefore the distance of our place from the Center of the Earth that is the half Diameter bears no proportion to the distance of the fixed Stars Secondly if we take the Meridian or Altitude of a fixed Star or one of the superiour Planets with an Astronomical Instrument we find the same as if we had observed it in the Center of the Earth Therefore the semidiameter of the Earth vanisheth away in respect of that distance Thirdly if there were any proportion then the distance of two Stars would be found to be lesser about the Horizon than
about the Meridian because in this position they are nearer to the Earth almost by one semidiameter of the Earth The same Argument is valid as touching the Sun also for his Diameter is not found greater in the Meridian than when he is yet on the Horizon But the Diameter of the Moon is observed to be a little greater in the Meridian than when as yet she is on the Horizon Therefore in the Meridian it is somewhat nigher to us to wit almost one Semidiameter of the Earth CHAP. VII Concerning the substance and constitution of the Earth WE have in the foregoing Chapters considered the qualities or properties of the Earth no regard being taken of its substance or being But now these being declared it is fitting we consider this also that we may know what kind of body the Earth is and how its parts cohere together the which although it may rather rather seem natural yet because it is requisite for the perfect knowledge of the Earth we will here handle briefly leaving the accurate consideration thereof to the Natural Philosopher Proposition I. To declare of what simple and similar Bodies the Earth may consist or be compounded of Of the four Elements of the Earth There are divers opinions of Philosophers concerning this matter The Peripateticks number four Elements of the Earth and the whole sublunary World being now sufficiently known to the very Vulgar Fire Air Water and Earth Many of the Ancients as Democritus and Leucippus determined that the whole World consisted of very little solid pieces which differ only in their various figures shapes and magnitude and them many of the later Philosophers do follow and of late Cartesius endeavoured by such an hypothesis to declare all natural appearances The three Principles of the Earth by Chymists Chymists make three Principles Sal Sulphur and Mercury to whom some do rightly add Caput mortuum or the Dead head when as they three are fruitful But to me doubtful terms and words being laid aside and the things themselves well considered there seem to be five simple Bodies the first Principles of all things By Others Five simple bodies the first principles of all things to wit Water Oyl or Sulphur Salt Earth and a certain Spirit which the Chymists call Mercury For indeed all Bodies and the parts of the Earth are resolved into those five Elementary substances Notwithstanding I deny not that those differ not so much in essence as in the singular variety of their shapes and magnitudes Therefore the whole Earth consisteth of these simple Bodies which are divers ways commixed from whence ariseth so great variety of Bodies which do appear different from one another and similar or Bodies of like parts But the more exquisite declaration of these points belong to Natural Philosophy which I shall have occasion to treat of more at large in the first Volume of my Book of the Arts and Sciences now ready for the Press Proposition II. The Earth is divided into dry and moist parts or into Earth and Water to which some joyn the Atmosphere This is the vulgar division of Geographers and then the Water is taken in a large signification for all that is liquid or moist and fluid and running as the Land is taken for the whole dry and consistent part of the Earth Of the Land and its various bodies of Nature and thereby doth embrace and comprehend such various bodies of Nature to wit First Sand Loam Clay and Mineral Earths Chalk Cinnaber Ochre Terra sigiâlata or Saracens Earth Earth of Samos Bole-Armoniack with divers other kinds of Earth Secondly Stones of various sorts the chief among which are Diamonds Emeralds Rubies Saphirs c. Thirdly Mettals among which are Gold Silver Copper Tin Lead Mercury or Quicksilver Iron Steel c. Fourthly Brimstone Salts Niter Alom Bitumen Vitriol Antimony c. Fifthly Herbs Plants c. Of the Water and its parts To the Water are referred first the Seas secondly Rivers and sweet Waters thirdly Lakes and Fens or Marshes fourthly Mineral Waters as hot Baths sowr Waters c. Of the Atmosphere which encompasses the Earth The Atmosphere is that thin and subtile Body which girts and encompasses the Earth towards Heaven and contains the Air Clouds showers of Rain c. Therefore into these three Parts the Earth is fitly divided Proposition III. To expound how the Earth and Waters cleave or hold together and make the Land The Earth not bounded with one Superficies but hath hollow Cavities 1. The Land that is the dry part of the Earth is not bounded with one and that even superficies or surface but she hath many hollow Caves many parts lifted up aloft In her Cavities caves or hollows which are here and there found round about the whole Earth the Sea or Ocean is contained and therefore part of the Earthly superficies is covered with Waters Those hollows or cavities are not made of an even hollowness but have here and there Rocks and elevated parts and elsewhere they have Gulphs and swallows sunk very deep So the part of the Earth appearing out above the Waters hath certain as it were Navels in its middle and some parts are more or less raised up or sunk down than others So it cometh to pass that the Water environing the whole Earth is hindred that it overwhelms not the whole Earth but the higher parts and such as appear above the Waters are Islands of which some are great and some small Mouths holes Pipes other conveyances in the body of the Earth 2. Besides that continual Channel in the Earth in the outward superficies within also in the solid body of the Earth there are innumerable Mouths holes swallows windings conveyances deeps pipes and huge vast Receivers in some of which there is the Sea which by that secret conveyance are joyned to the Channel of the common Sea in some again there is Sweet Waters Rivers Streams In some spirits or else a sulphury and smoking substance Seneca saith rightly He gives too much way to his eye-sight who believeth not that there are in the hidden and secret bosom of the Earth Bays of a vast Sea Neither do I perceive what may hinder that there may not be some Sea-shore and the Sea received by hidden passages There is therefore no cause of doubting of there being many hollows in the very solid Earth For verily we conjecture at it by these means First by the Rivers which are found in many places where Earth is digged even to a notable depth which is frequent in Mines Secondly in some places the profundity of the Sea is beyond all sounding or measure Thirdly there are some Caves in the Earth In the Western part of Hispaniola is a Mountain of a great height being hollow within with many Caves in which Rivers of Waters are thrown down headlong with so great sound and rushing noise of streams that the very fall of those Waters may be heard
hindred doth flow from more high places to places more low If therefore the place about the Shore was not so high as in the middle of the Ocean part of the Sea would flow from the middle of the Ocean to the Shore and would neither consist or be calm which yet is not found in the tranquillity of the Air. 2. If that the Ocean far remote from the Shores were more high than the Sea at the Shore that Altitude would be discovered a far longer interval than a Spherical Superficies doth admit of yea it would be seen from the same distance from which the parts of the Ocean intercepted between that Altitude and the Shore are seen And experience testifieth that it cannot be beheld from a greater distance but that by degrees the more remote part is detected after the more near when we come to Mediterranean places to the Shore And by how much any part is more vicine to the shore by so much it is first or by a larger interval beheld from the shore Therefore the part of the Ocean removed from the shore is not higher than that part that is nigh unto it Wherefore the Ocean is of the same Altitude every where both in the middle and at the shore and not higher than the Earth 3. Mariners in the midst of the Ocean and deep Sea although they apply their Mathematical Instruments yet find it no higher there than in the parts near the shore which certainly could not be if that the Sea had any Altitude elevated as a Tower or Mountain For as by Instruments we find the Altitude of Towers or Mountains above the subjected parts of the Earth so also if that there were any Altitude of the middle Ocean above the vicine parts it could not be obstructed and avoid the subtilty of Instruments 4. Also here and there in the middle of the Ocean are found Islands and that in great number in some parts which are near to the Continents or great Islands Therefore the middle of the Ocean is not higher than the Earth because it is not higher than the Shores of those Islands 5. No cause can be shew'd why Water in the middle of the Ocean should be higher and not flow into the Chanels of Rivers if that their Waters be more depresâed For by experience we find that Water any where scituated moveth to the vicine parts and these are less high which have been the cause of so many inundations From these I think we sufficiently collect that the Waters of the Ocean are not higher than the shoars of the Land Seeing therefore the Altitude of very few shoars is elevated little more than the vicine Mediterranean Land and in most lesser seeing that the Altitude of the Lands from the shoars to the Mediterranean places increaseth and riseth into Hills thence we conclude that the superficies of the Ocean is not higher than the superficies of the Land Now that the Altitude of the Land from the shoars to the Mediterranean places augmenteth or that the Mediterranean places are higher than the shoars is proved from the flux of Rivers most of which arise in Mediterranean places and flow to the Ocean So then at least the Mediterranean parts are somewhat more elevated than the shoars because the flux is from these unto them for Water floweth from the more high parts to places more inferiour Now that some are somewhat depressed lower than the Water we shall not go about to deny but they are either defended by the height of their shoars or by banks or other interposed earth Now these Banks are raised for the most part not because of the great Altitude of the Ocean being tranquillous and in its natural state but by reason of its impetuous motion caused by the Winds or from some other cause Corollary Corollary Therefore they are deceived who will have the Waters of the Ocean to be higher than the Earth and flie to a miraculous providence by which the inundation of the Ocean on the Land and drowning of the World is hindred and restrained For we have shewed that the superficies of the Water and Earth are one and almost the same to wit spherical and that many parts of the Earth at least the shoars have a greater Altitude than the middle of the Ocean and that this is the cause that the Ocean cannot overflow the Lands Which greater Altitude if it be elevated in some shoars the Banks being broken or the Water being augmented or forced to them in great abundance cause inundations Neither is it altogether impossible or contrary to nature that the whole Earth should be covered with Water as we shall shew in the end of the Chapter Proposition III. Why the Sea being beheld from the shoar seemeth to arise in a greater Altitude and tumor by how much it is more remote The middle of the Ocean by some said to be many miles higher than the Shoars It is a fallacy of the sight or of the estimating faculty which hath brought many into this errour so that they have endeavoured to defend that the middle of the Ocean is many miles higher than the Shoars But it is a wonder that none of them have taken notice of daily Experiments in the ordinary course of our life in which this fallacy is sufficiently manifest For if that we look on any Pavement or floor stretched at length or any row of Pillars the more remote parts of the Pavement will appear more high than the vicine parts so that from thence from our place to the most remote the Floor will seem by degrees more and more to elevate which yet notwithstanding it is every where of the same Altitude After the same mode it is with the Waters of the Ocean for if on the Shoar you use a Geodetical Instrument commodious to measure places withal you shall find no elevation of the remote part of the Ocean above the Shoar but rather a little depression so that the Waters sink beneath the Horizon of the Shoars Those that are versed in the Opticks declare the cause of the fallacy Let A be the Eye See Scheme and let it survey the pavement or superficies of the Water extended at length unto the long space a e. Let the Angle a A e be divided into equal parts or four Angles which are e A d d A c c A b b A a from the right drawn A b A c A d to wit the more remote shall be far more great as appeareth from the Diagram viz. e d is greater than d e and d e greater than b c and b c than a h. Although these parts are very unequal yet they will appear equal because they appear under the equal Angles a A b b A c c A d d A c and the Estimative faculty will judge them to be removed an equal distance from the Eye A in which there is a great deception and therefore will judge the lines A b A c A d
A c to be A f A g A h A k as they are equal a b f g g h h k whence the parts b c cd d e seem elevated as if they were f g g h h k. Or more briefly because the Eye is more elevated to behold Objects remote than it is depressed at things near therefore remote things are judged to be elevated and those nigh depressed or because we compare the elevation of our Eye to parts vicine therefore we judge them depressed but we cannot so compare the elevation of our Eye to parts remote wherefore they seem more elevated than in truth they are So therefore we see from this that the Ocean to one that beholdeth it from the Shoar seemeth higher by how much it is the more remote from thence I say it is no probation that it is more elevated Some render another Reason viz. that therefore a greater Altitude is to be attributed to the middle of the Ocean than to the Earth by reason that they suppose that otherwise it cannot come to pass that water should flow from the Ocean to Fountains of Rivers which Fountains are in Mediterranean planes seeing that no water floweth but from an higher place unto one more low depressed But I shall shew it to be performed by another way in the Chapter where I treat of the Original of Rivers or Fountains And so also any one may inferr that the Mountain of Teneriff is not so high as also other Mountains as to be beheld in the Ocean for so long an interval at four degrees except that the foot of the Mountain or the Ocean be higher than the Sea at the Shoar of Teneriff But what Answer is to be returned to this is manifest from the Eleventh Chapter See Chap. II. whee we have treated of the Original or heights of Mountains Proposition IV. To exhibit the cause and Original of Gulphs Bays and Streights of the Ocean The cause of Gulphs Bays and Streights in the Ocean These Bays in proper manner of Speech are the Sinus of the Land not of the Ocean but rather Arms branches and procurrent parts of the Ocean But more properly we may term those to be sinus or Bays of the Ocean where the Ocean receiveth into it self Peninsula's of the Earth as where it receiveth Jutland the Chersonesus of Malacca California and the like But the usual mode of Speech hath so obtained that contrary to the nature of things the word is so taken in the first signification and a Sinus or Bay of the Ocean is the same with a branch or procurrent part of the Ocean The cause of Bays The cause of these Sinus or Bays is by reason that the extant parts of the Earth are in some places mutually rent from one another and divaricated so that the part of the Earth interposed between the divaricated parts is more depressed than the superficies of the Ocean therefore the water always tending to the more depressed part floweth into the divaricated parts and runneth forward so far until it meeteth the elevation of the Earth for here it can go no farther and therefore it receiveth its end or bound The same is the cause of the Streights of the Ocean or Sea The cause of the separation or divarication of the parts of the Earth which is required to the existence of Bays and Streights is the violent motion of the Sea when it is forced by Winds or some other cause which seeing that it is done almost every day so that it beateth the Lands with its waves thence it cometh to pass that in progress of time in some parts of the Shoars the Land is so shaken that it falleth on the rushing in of the Ocean and maketh way for it and if the Land adjoyning to the shoar be depressed Bays do more easily arise viz when the Land of the shoar is broken through the water will overflow the adjacent Lands and so make a Bay if that the land be so depressed or consist of so much matter which may easily be removed by the violent waves And so it is manifest that Bays and Streights may be made and exist anew but thence we may not conclude that all Bays and Streights that are at this day were so generated for it may be that some existed with the Earth it self or Ocean and therefore coeval with the very Ocean For there is no record of the making of any new Bay of the Sea or Streight although the Ancient Grecians fabulously reported such concerning the generation of the Gaditan or Herculean Streights viz. they said that the Mountain Calpe on the Spanish Coast and the Mountain Abyla on the African Coast were one Mountain but separated by Hercules whence they called these Mountains Hercules Pillars and the Streights Hercules Streights The Streights between Sicily and Italy But as concerning the Streights between Sicily and Italy which the Ancients believed to be caused by an incursion of the Sea we ought less to doubt that such small Streights should be generated for we deny not but such like may be generated at this day Also Bays may be made of Streights and Streights may become Bays For Example If that either of the Mouths of Magellans Streights or of the Streights of Manilhas should be obstructed those Streights would become long Bays on the contrary if that the Isthmus between Asia and Africa should be taken away then the whole Red Sea would become a Streight through which a Ship might sail from the Indian Ocean into the Mediterranean Sea Proposition V. Whether the Ocean every where be of the same Altitude That all the parts of the Ocean are of the same Altitude being in its natural constitution and all impediments removed is manifest from the first Proposition by which we shewed that the superficies of the Ocean is spherical and that its Center is the Center of the Earth hence it plainly followeth that it must be of the same Altitude in all its parts But here is a doubt whether there be not some causes that may render some parts of the Ocean more high than other This is most worthy of consideration and is also of great moment when we consult concerning the digging through of Isthmusses and conjoyning parts of the Sea Many will have that the Ocean and Earth is higher about the North and lower about the Equator So Aristotle lib. 2. De Coelo Cap. 2. they alledge this Reason That the Ocean seemeth to flow from the North Regions as from a Fountain But we cannot conclude any thing certain from this for whether the Northern Lands especially the North Channels be more high or lower than the Channels of the Lands near the Equator is yet doubted neither is it sufficiently proved from the motion because this is not general or is not found in all the Northern Regions And if this motion of the Ocean from the North should be granted yet thence it would not follow that the Ocean was there
being conveyed into the German Ocean and hence into various parts of the Earth but when that they had perfected a great part of the Channel The Water of the German Ocean higher than the Land they were compelled to desist by reason that at length they found by observation that the water of the German Ocean was higher than the Land of Leyden and the Shores of this Ocean therefore the German Ocean is higher than the Belgick Bay But we must esteem otherwise of those Bays which flow between the Lands not by an oblong but by a broad tract as the Bays or Gulphs of Mexico Bengala and others that these are of the same Altitude with the Ocean from which they are separated by no strait passages is not to be doubted of Although I am not ignorant that the Spaniards formerly did question this latter viz. whether the Pacifick Ocean were higher than the Bay of Mexico when they consulted of digging through the American Isthmus or that of Panama that they might have a free and convenient passage from the Bay of Mexico to Peru China and the Indian Isles viz. the Spaniards feared least the English Dutch and other Nations should use this Streight and stop the mouth of it and so invade Peru. Wherefore to conclude it seemeth that we must determine that all the parts and broad Bays of the Ocean are all of the same Altitude as the first Proposition proveth See Proposit I. but that the long Gulphs or Bays especially those let in through an angust Channel or Streight are somewhat more low chiefly in the extream parts Concerning which yet I could wish that more diligent Observations were made viz. these are the doubts 1. Whether the Indian Atlantick and Pacifick Ocean be of the same Altitude or whether the Indian or Pacifick be higher than the Atlantick 2. Whether the Northern Ocean properly so called viz. that which is near to the Pole or in the frigid Zone be higher than the Atlantick Ocean 3. Whether the Red Sea be higher than the Mediterranean 4. Whether the Pacifick be higher than the Gulph of Mexico 5. Whether the Baltick Ocean be equally as high as the Atlantick The same should be observed concerning Hudsons Bay Streights of Magellan and such other Concerning the Euxine Sea we shall treat in the fifteenth Chapter The continual flux and reflux of the Sea and other fluxes altogether cause the divers Altitudes of the parts of the Ocean and in the same part in a diverse time and hours of the day But these are external causes and we at present only consider the natural constitution of the Water moreover they do not so vary the Altitude in the Ocean it self as it appeareth at the shoars Corollary Therefore we cannot assent to Papyrius Fabianus and Cleomedes which made the greatest Altitude of the Ocean to be fifteen stadia's half a German mile except we must take their Opinion concerning the profundity and so Altitude is ill placed there for profundity Proposition VI. The depth of the Sea or Ocean in most parts may be sounded by the Load or Plummet there being very few places whose bottom hath not been yet found out The depth of the Sea in most places may be sounded The profundity of the Ocean is various according to the more or less depression of the Channels it is found 1 80 of a mile 1 20 ¼ ½ in very few places about a German mile where they have not line enough to sound the depth albeit here it be probable that it is not terminated at any vast distance But yet we deny not but that in the profound Channels there be as it were some hollownesses The profundity of the Sea is far lesser in the Sinus or Bays than in the Ocean which Channel is less profound or hollowed by reason of the vicinity of the Land as for the same reason the Ocean is less deep at the shoar than in places more remote from the Land which hapneth only by reason of the hollow figure of its Channels Of the Mariners Plumet Mariners sound the profundity with a Plumet of Lead in form of a Pyramid of about 12 pound weight if that the line be of three or four pound such as is sufficient unto 200 perches although others require a plumb of more weight Yet there may be a deceit in this Observation if so be that the line being snatched by the Vortices of the waters or waters themselves do not descend perpendicularly but obliquely But where the profundity of the Ocean is so great that neither Cables or Chains are sufficient is uncertain although some have invented something for finding out of this For they determine that you must observe how much time passeth in the space whilst a Plumet of noted weight descendeth to the profundity of the Sea Then you must apply a Cork or Alder-pith to the Plumet or a blown-up Bladder so that this may presently be separated from the lead when that the lead hath hit the bottom of the Sea and so an application being made the lead must be let down again to the bottom and the time must be noted until the Cork return to the superficies of the Sea From this Observation if it be compared with the observations made in another place they suppose that the profundity of the Ocean may be found by the use of some Canons But the uncertainty of the Rules and the fallacy of the Observations and the so great brevity of time is such that I think the knowledge of the depth can never be obtained by this method Yet this is sufficiently manifest that the depth of the Ocean is no where infinite but every where hath a bottom For seeing that the Earth it self is not infinite but round and in a figure returning into it self it is manifest that the profundity of the Ocean is not infinite neither doth it extend from one part of the superficies through the Center to the opposite superficies so that it may separate the parts of the Earth mutually from one another because the Earth is heavier than the Water and therefore the parts of the Earth if that they were separated by the interceding Earth yet presently would be conjoyned again But from the profundity observed hitherto in most places it is manifest that it is almost equal to the Altitude of the Mountains and Mediterranean places above the shoar viz. as much as these are elevated and are extant above the Horizon of the shoar so much are the Channels of the Sea depressed beneath it or as much as the Earth riseth from the shoars towards the Mediterranean places so much by degrees more and more is it depressed even unto the places of the middle of the Ocean where for the most part is the greatest depth The profundity is changed sometimes in this sometimes in that part for divers reasons 1. By reason of the flux and reflux 2. With the increase and decrease of the Moon 3. From
the Winds 4. From the ruin or subsidency of the Channels or Shoars also if that the bottom of the Channel be made higher in progress of time by the fall of the Sand or Mud. Proposition VII The Ocean hath no Fountains but is contained within the Cavities of the Earth yet it doth not remain always the same The Ocean hath no Fountains Experience testifieth that waters of Rivers proceed from Fountains or Springs and because that this hath been for so many Centuries of years it thence necessarily followeth that that water which continually floweth from the Springs to the Sea returneth through subterranean passages or some other ways to the same Fountain After the same manner there were Philosophers in Old time said that the Sea sprang from certain Fountains Neither could the magnitude and perpetuity of the Ocean withdraw them from this Opinion for they said that it returned unto the same Fountains by some hollowness of the Earth or by some other mode that so they might render a cause of the perpetual flux This Opinion may be answered after this manner If that the Ocean have Fountains they must either be in the extant part of the Earth or in that part which is covered by the Ocean that is in the very Channel or bosom of the Ocean but they are not in the extant part of the Earth for Men have no where found them Neither may you object That peradventure they are in the unknown Lands of the North or South for this would be a part of high confidence to require that to be granted which carrieth no weight of reason with it especially seeing that at not a few of the Northern lands the Sea is found frozen up with Ice and in most of those Regions hitherto discovered no Springs are found Therefore the Fountains of the Ocean are not in the extant part of the Earth It remaineth that we prove that they ãâã neither in the part of the Earth covered with waters that is in the bosome of the Sea If that they were in this there would be no more distance from the Center of the Earth than the waters of the Ocean it self and therefore there would be no flux from them but the water would rest in them whose nature it is not to be moved from places depressed to places more high For the Fountains of all Rivers are more elevated than the waters that they send forth But some may object That this is a violent motion because that the Channel of the Ocean and the Land is perforated within with many hollownesses and pits call them what you please which proceed for a long Tract under the Earth until they are let into some other place of the Channel of the Ocean So that there are two Orifices of these Channels which may have a sufficient great Latitude and Extension within the Earth going forth into the Channel of the Ocean therefore it may be that the water from the Ocean may flow into one of these two Orifices and some forth of the other as from a Fountain which may be illustrated by an easie Diagram And by that reason that nothing hindreth but that there may be many of these subterraneous passages and no absurdity thence followeth therefore it may seem probable to some that there are many of these Fountains in the very Channel of the Sea But this imagination is vain and not agreable to the properties of water for water having fallen into either of these Channels would not go forth by the other Orifice but would rest filled in it except moved by some violent cause For although water should be pressed and stirred by water forcing in on the Orifice yet it could not exonerate it self by the other Orifice because that water incumbeth on this Orifice also no less than the incumbing water at the former Orifice which may thus be proved by experience See Scheme Let there be in any Vessel water ABCD AB is the superficies of the water lying equally and spherically but let in a stick RPEF into the middle of the vessel which may perforate it by an oblique passage so that the part of the vessel A shall be higher than the whole of the part of the vessel B therefore the water as well on the part A as on the part B should for example flow through g h into this passage and fill it up and should not be effused through either of the Orifices not through g because this is higher nor through h because though it be more depressed than g yet the water flowing from the part B and perpendicularly tending to the bottom of the vessel would prohibit the influx From these it is manifest that the Ocean hath no Fountain but is perpetually contained within its own Channel But somewhat may be objected against this Objections which is worthy of consideration First That at some part or other of the Ocean there is always a violent external moving cause as Winds Fluxes Refluxes mutations of the Earth and the like Therefore these cause that sometimes in some one part of the Ocean and sometimes in another there is a greater Altitude and abundancy of water than in the other parts and therefore that higher water falling into the subterraneous passages is again poured forth into another part of the Channel of the Ocean where there is a lesser Altitude of water by reason of that external cause and where the incumbent water then less resisteth the eruption or efflux because it is moved another way by an external cause for although this may be yet it cannot be proved by experience neither can the contrary that is this be demonstrated to be so therefore at least the truth is uncertain and we must doubt concerning this Problem Now that there are such subterraneous pits or passages in the Channel of the Ocean cannot be denied and those places of the Ocean seem to shew them to wit where there is an immense profundity seeing there is no such in the vicine parts To this I answer although we should admit of those subterraneous passages yet therefore it doth not follow that we should grant that they proceed to another part of the Channel of the Ocean or go forth into it and if that this should be granted yet seeing that there are no such passages in all places and that these external causes sometimes are predominate in one part of the Ocean and sometimes in another there is no consequence from the objection that the Fountains of the Ocean are in any certain place but that it floweth sometimes from one part of the Channel and sometimes from another so that that flux continueth no longer than the external cause continueth 2. Some one may thus seem to argue The flux of the Ocean is perpetually discerned from the Northern Land or quarter toward the South between Europe and the Northern America also between Asia and the Northern America Yet notwithstanding no part of the Ocean or
vicine place is to be found whereby it may come unto those Northern Regions Seeing that therefore this flux is perpetual neither doth the water come by a manifest way unto those Regions whence the flux is made therefore it seemeth necessary to conclude that the waters come through subterraneous passages unto those Northern Regions and so there to be effused from the holes of the Channel as from a spring and that the water moveth hence towards the South There falleth in another cause taken from the former For the water of the Ocean in the Torrid Zone is more heavy than that in the Northern places by reason of the great abundance of Salt as we have proved in the Eighth and Twelfth Proposition Therefore the water or Ocean in the Torrid Zone doth more press through the Orifices of the Subterranean passages than in the Northern places and therefore in these places the water less resisting suffereth the water to flow from the Orifices of the Channels Unto this I answer That that flux of the Ocean is not only from the North as the Objection seemeth to inferr and as some especially the Ancients conceived of it who would have the water to flow in four Channels from the very Pole as also some Geographical Maps do exhibit it neither is it continual but is observed by reason of the frequency of Northern Winds moreover the great and perpetual abundance of Snow and Rain in those places augmenteth the water and causeth it to flow towards the South Add likewise that in other parts another motion of the Ocean is found concerning which see the following Chapter 3. It seemeth not absurd but rather most true that all the Fountains of Rivers taken together disburthening themselves into the Ocean are the very Fountains of the Ocean For seeing that in perpetual progress of time so great an abundance of water floweth from them into the Ocean questionless the water cometh from the Ocean to the very Springs and Channels of the Rivers partly through the Subterranean passages and partly by Rains 4. It may seem to prove that the Fountains of the Ocean may be in the very Channel because that in the bottom of the Ocean in some parts sweet or fresh water is found which could not be but by some Fountains flowing in the bottom Linschaten relateth that in Ormus fresh water is drawn by divers in the Ocean at the depth of four or five Orgya and the like Fountains are found in other parts of the Ocean and Bays Unto this I answer That few such Springs have yet been found which suffice not the vast Ocean Neither do we dispute concerning these Fountains as we have said before Hence it is manifest that in some sort it is true and we may well say that the Ocean hath Springs but not in that sense that we are wont to speak concerning the Springs of Rivers and in which we would have our Proposition to be taken Hence also it is manifest what we ought to think concerning that Question viz. Whether the Sea is always one and the same and perpetually so remaineth or whether it be another thing whose parts are perpetually consumed and generated again Proposition VIII The saltness of the Waters proceedeth from the particles of Salt which are mixed with it but whence they may exist or are so augmented is the doubt Of the Saltness of the Sea-water Experlence proveth the first member of the Proposition by which it is commonly known that Salt is made of Sea-water by decoction of the water or by the heat of the Sun or the fervour of the Fire In Germany and other places the water is separated by the help of the Fire In France the greater heat of the Sun performeth the same the Ocean being let into certain Trenches made in which in the space of some Months the water being exhaled by the force of the Sun Of Salt and of what made concreted and hard Salt is found On the shoars of many Regions as of England and other parts plenty of Bay-Salt is found the Sea-water continually overflowing those shoars leaveth daily some particles or humors from which the water exhaleth and concrete Salt is left whose blackness is taken away by boyling although it be washed away and dissolved from many Coasts by the violence of the Ocean which is the cause that it is not found on all Coasts Seeing therefore that this Experiment is common Aristotle had small reason to alledge a false Experiment concerning a waxen Vessel let down into the Sea Hence it is manifest that the proximate cause of the Saltness of the Sea-water or the true subject of this saltness is the Saline particles which are contained in that water Therefore the Aristotelians with their Master spake improperly and obscuredly without cause when they defend and say That the saltness of the Sea proceedeth from the adustion of the Sea caused by the Sun or from the adust particles But of this more anon The chief difficulty and controversie is concerning the other member of the Proposition Whence these Salt particles of the Ocean exist Aristotle supposeth that dry exhalations or fumes all which he saith are of an adust and Saline nature elevated from the Earth are mixed with humid vapours and when that these have met together in Rain they fall with these into the Sea and that thence proceedeth the saltness and Salt particles in the Sea See Aristotle lib. 2. chap. 7. and on this account he seemeth to defend this Opinion because that from thence he may render a reason why the Sea is always salt But other Peripateticks will have it and so do endeavour to draw Aristotle to their part that this saltness is in the Sea it self by reason that it is perpetually scorched by the heat of the Sun a sign of which is that the water is found by so much the less salt by how much it is more deep or remote from the superficies for in the superficies we discover it to be most salt Both these Opinions are obstructed with great difficulties and absurdities so that it seemeth wonderful that the minds of Philosophers and Learned men could acquiesce in them First the opinion of Aristotle is thus obstructed that Salt-rain should be found in the Ocean which never yet was found to be void of all tast of salt Secondly the Sea should be less salt when it raineth not for a long time the contrary of which yet is found The other Opinion hath these difficulties 1. It is false that the waters of the Ocean are found the less salt by how much they are nigh to the bottom for there are few places viz. in those bottoms where Springs of fresh water do flow 2. Experience testifieth that fresh water although long exposed to the Sun or heat of the Fire yet doth not become salt This Objection Scaliger endeavoureth to avoid by an over-nice subtilty for he saith that this hapneth in these Observations by reason of
Salt but this is a deceitful sign The 4th Cause 4. The fourth Cause of the unequal saltness is the frequency or scarcity of Rains unto which we may add Snow and in the Northern places Snow and Rain is frequent in the places of the Torrid Zone they are less frequent in some parts of the year and in othersome they are almost continual And therefore in these places in the pluvial Months the water of the Ocean is not so salt on the shoar and hath less Salt in it than in the dry Months Yea in many Regions of the Coast of Malabar the Ocean is fresh in the pluvial Months by reason of the abundance of water that floweth from the top of the Mountain Gatis and falleth into the Sea for this very reason in divers Seasons of the year the same Ocean is of a various saltness yet because in the Northern places the Rains and Snows are continual throughout the whole year therefore this Sea is less salt than in the Torrid Zone The 5th Cause 5. The fifth Cause is the dissimilary solution or unequal faculty of the Water to dissolve this Salt and unite it to its self for hot water sooner uniteth Salt unto it self than cold Water although therefore in the Northern places of the Ocean the shoars and Channels of the same contain more or the like quantity of Salt that those places of the Torrid Zone do yet because the water is there more cold it is not so able to dissolve and unite the Salt to it self so subtily us the water in the Torrid Zone which is more hot The 6th Cause 6. The sixth cause is the exoneration of many and great Rivers into the Sea but this cause only taketh place in the parts of the Ocean that are vicine to the shoars but is not discovered in the remote parts So Mariners affirm that the Ocean on the Coast of Brasilia where the Silver-River disburtheneth it self loseth it saltness and affordeth fresh waters fifteen miles distant from the shoar The same is observed of the African Ocean on the Coasts of Congi where the River Zaire exonerateth it self and of many more Rivers Unto these add runing Fountains in some parts of the bottom of the Ocean These are the Causes which seem to concur to the variety and diversity of saltness in divers parts of the Ocean from which the saltness of every one of the Seas may be explained From whence also it is easy to give an account why the water of the German and Northern Ocean is less apt to separate Salt from it self by coction than the water of the Spanish Ocean the Canary Isles and that of Cape Verd whence the Dutch fetch Salt in great abundance and transport it into the Northern Regions viz. this Ocean is more near the Torrid Zone and receiveth water from the Ocean of the Torrid Zone the other is more remote from the Frigid Zone yet I cannot deny the constitution of the Channels themselves to be more or less saline The Sea-water at Guinee in the Ethiopick Ocean affordeth Salt at one coction as white as snow such as neither the Spanish Ocean nor any other in Europe do produce at one coction or boyling Proposition XI Why Rain-water in the middle of the Ocean is found sweet but the water which we separate from the Marine or Salt-water either by decoction or distillation is yet notwithstanding found salt when yet the Rain-water proceedeth from the Vapours exhaled from the Sea Fresh-water abstracted from Salt-water The Learned Chymists or true Naturalists have hitherto laboured in vain that they might find out an Art by which they might distill and abstract fresh water from the water of the Ocean which would be of great advantage but as yet their Labours have proved fruitless for although as well in the decoction as distillation Salt may be left in the bottom of the Vessel yet the water separated by decoction as well as distillation is yet found salt and not fit for men to drink which seemeth wonderful unto those that are ignorant of the cause Yet Chymistry that is true Philosophy hath taught the reason for by the benefit of this we know that there is a twofold salt in Bodies or two kinds of salt which although they agree in tast yet they much differ in other qualities one of these Artists term fixed the other volatile salt The fixed salt by reason of its gravity is not elevated in distillation but remaineth in the bottom of the Vessel but the volatile salt is full of spirit and indeed is nothing else but a most subtile spirit that is elevated by a very light fire and therefore in the distillation ascendeth with the fresh water and is more firmly united by reason of the subtilty of the Attoms neither is this volatile salt found only with fixed salt in Sea-water but almost in all bodies as Chymistry proveth by experience but in some in a greater and in othersome in a lesser quantity in a greater quantity in sharp tasted Herbs in a lesser in oily Herbs Therefore difficulty consisteth in the separation of this salt spirit or volatile salt from the water But why the pluvial water in the midst of the Sea is no less fresh than on the Land seeing that yet it is generated by abstraction of the exhalations of the Ocean caused by the fervour of the Sun or from some subterraneous fire which evaporation doth little differ from distillation The cause seemeth to be Fourfold 1. A slow operation by which the tenuous part is only elevated from the Ocean which although it containeth a saline volatile spirit yet it hath it in less quantity than if that this exhalation were caused by a more forcible heat 2. The long way that this vapour passeth through before that it arriveth unto that Region of the Air where it is condensated into rain in passage it is possible that the saline spirit is by degrees separated from the watery particles 3. The admixture of other watery particles existing in the air 4. A Refrigeration Coition and condensation of the vapour for these exhalations exhaled from the Ocean by degrees are more and more refrigerated and being conjoyned with other obvious and admixed vapours they condense into a more thick vapour or cloud in this Refrigeration and condensation or coition of the saline spirit with the fiery particles they fly into the more exalted part of the Air. Now why the same is not performed in distillation where the vapours exalted are also condensed the cause is 1. That by reason of the small passage the saline spirit is as yet over straitly conjoyned to the watery particles 2. That the vapour restrained in the vessel admitteth not a free passage to the evolant spirit Proposition XII Sea-water is more ponderous than fresh water and the water of one Sea is more heavy than another Sea water more heavy than fresh water The cause is manifest from what hath been said
flux or deflux yea those terms are not apt enough but it is better to call it an Intumescency and Detumescency so that by these peculiar appellations the quality of the flux or motion may be distinguished from the motion or flux it self For the Sea always floweth from the East to the West and only appeareth to re-flow by reason that when in one place there is a greater quantity of water and that it floweth with vehemency to a certain place afterwards in another time this impetus ceaseth But it is therefore termed a reflux because that the Sea seemeth in Bays and Shores to draw near and depart According to the extension of bays and shores which hapneth not by reason of the quality of the Motion it self but by reason of the scituation of Coasts and Channels viz. that the Water doth return back to a contrary quarter but that the Sea falleth down this proceedeth not from the scituation of the Coasts but from the condition of the place it self Neither ought or can the motion of the Sea be regarded from the appulse to the shore for whatsoever the motion of the Sea be or unto what quarter soever it be made the flux is always towards the shore which is by reason of the fluid nature of the water Now seeing that both the flux or reflux or in the intumescency and detumescency the Sea is moved towards the same quarter viz. from the East to the West and doth not re-flow again is collected from hence First that in the Ocean removed from the shores under the Torrid Zone no other motion is found than that by which it is carried from the East to the West Secondly In the Streights which directly extend from East to West and in which the parts of the Ocean are joyned as the Streights of Magellan Manillan Java and others amongst the Indian Isles In these Streights I say the Sea indeed swelleth and falleth in twelve hours but yet the Sea in the detumescency doth flow back from out the Streights from the West to the East therefore another orifice of the Streight into the West which is a manifest sign that this intumescency and detumescency is not a peculiar motion but a modification of the general motion neither doth the Sea flow back into the East Therefore Scaliger and all others are deceived which here introduce a double motion replicated into it self But yet this must be understood that when we say that this motion is made from the East to the West the Cardinal quarters are not only understood but also those quarters that are collateral viz. the Sea is moved also by this flux from the Collateral quarters of the East unto the Collateral quarters of the West yea unto the North and South but not by so forcible and valid motion Proposition XI To declare the cause of the intumescency and detumescency of the Sea or the flux and reflux vulgarly so termed The cause of the flux and reflux of the Sea There is almost no phaenomenon of Nature that hath more exercised the wits of Learned men and Philosophers and that hath deluded more endeavours Some have made the Sea and Earth to be an Animal which by its inspiration and expiration hath caused the flux and reflux Others make the cause to be a great Vortex near to Norway which for six hours sucketh up the water and for so many spueth them out again Scaliger and Others supposed the Coasts especially those of America to be the cause thereof by reason that they repel the appulse of the Sea which proceedeth from the general motion But many when that they discover the connexion of this intumescency and detumescency with the motion of the Moon determined that it only depended on that But how this should be is a more than ordinary task to discover seeing that they reply nothing else but that the Moon doth attract upwards humors by an occult quality and sympathy But these are only words which signifie nothing else but that the effect is caused by the Moon after some mode that we are ignorant of but this is the mode demanded Cartesius deduceth it from his general Hypothesis after this manner Let the Diagram of the Ninth Proposition be taken See Scheme in which let A B C D be that Vortex which hath the Earth for its Center which with it and with the Moon is carried in a greater Vortex about the Sun M the Center of the Vortex E F G H the Earth 1234 the superficies of the Sea from which for the greater perspicuity we do suppose the Earth to be encompassed on every side and 5678 the superficies of the Air encompassing of the Sea Now if that there were no Moon in this Vortex the point T which is the Center of the Earth ought to be in the point M which is the Center of the Vortex but the Moon being towards B this Center of the Earth T ought to be between M and D by reason that the Celestial matter of this Vortex is somewhat more quicker moved than the Moon or the Earth which it carrieth with it Except that the point T were a little more distant from B than from D the presence of the Moon would hinder that that should not so freely flow between B and T so seeing that the place of the Earth in this Vortex is not determinated excâââ from the equality of the strength of the Celestial matter flowing about it therefore it is evident that it ought somewhat to approach towards D. And after the same mode when the Moon shall be in C the Center of the Earth ought to be between M and A and so always the Earth departeth a little from the Moon Moreover because by this means from this that the Moon is towards B not only the space through which the Celestial matter floweth between B and T but also that space through which it floweth between T and D is rendred more angust thence it followeth that this Celestial matter there floweth more swiftly and therefore doth more press both the superficies of the Air in 6 and 8 and also the superficies of the Water in 2 and 4 than if that the Moon were not in the Diameter of the Vortex B D Now seeing that both the bodies of the Air and Water are fluid and easily obnoxious to this pression they ought not to be so high above the parts of the Earth F and H as if the Moon were without this Diameter B D and so also on the contrary they ought to be higher towards G and E so that the superficies of the Water 1 and 3 and of the Air 5 and 7 do there protuberate Now because that part of the Earth which is now in F on the opposite quarter of the point B where the Sea is very little high after six hours it will be in G on the opposite Region of the point C where it is most high and after other six hours in H on the Region of
the point D and so consequently or rather because that the Moon in the mean space doth somewhat proceed forwards from B towards C as running in a Months space through the Circle A B C D part of the Earth that is now in F on the opposite Region of the body of the Moon after six hours and twelve minutes either more or less shall be beyond the point G in that Diameter of the Vortex A B C D which intersecteth that Diameter of the same Vortex in which the Moon shall then be at right Angles and then shall the water be there most high and after six hours with twelve minutes it shall be beyond the point H. in the place where the water shall be very low c. whence it is clearly discovered that the water of the Sea in every twelve hours and twenty four minutes shall flow and re-flow in one and the same place This is the Demonstration of Cartesius in which that is especially ingenious that it aptly sheweth not only how the flux or intumescency is made at the place when that the Moon is moved at its Vertex or Meridian but also when that the Moon beneath the Horizon is moved to the Meridian of Midnight We have said in the end of the Ninth Proposition what any one may seem to require in this Demonstration especially that which seemeth to be admired at that Cartesius should not so much as think that according unto this Demonstration That the least Altitude of water and all kind of Detumescency ought to be when that the Moon cometh to the Meridian as the Moon being in B the least Altitude of water is in 2 and 4 and on the contrary the water increaseth with the departure of the Moon or Earth so that when F shall be in G. that is six hours from the Moon it shall have the greatest Altitude which in truth is contrary to all Experience for with the access of the Moon to the Meridian the water increaseth and with the departure of the same decreaseth But the words of Cartesius as well as the Diagramma assert the contrary But I suppose this absurdity may be removed from the Demonstration and that by this mode so that it may be approved of by Cartesius for let us place the Vortex of the Earth A B C D to be without the Moon and the water 1 2 3 4 to be equally distant from the Center T without any Tumor but yet to be moved round with the Earth and Celestial matter between A B C D and 5 6 7 8. Now let the body of the Moon draw near unto this Vortex for Example into B and therefore the space T B becometh more narrow and the Celestial matter whilst that it endeavoureth to pass through it presseth the Water in 2 towards E. Therefore whilst that the Water is expelled from 2 towards E it is demanded where the greatest tumor of Water will be whether in the place E which is a quarter distant from the place F unto which the Moon is vertical or whether in a place nigh unto F towards E If that you assert the first viz. that the tumor ought to be in E Experience doth then gainsay but that the second is truly so Experience confirmeth and Reason doth induce to believe viz. whilst that the Moon consisteth above the place E the Water is expelled from 2 towards I but the greatest tumor will be in the place near to 2 not in I. For this is manifest by Experience because the Occidental places do later discover the intumescency but reason and the motion of the Water do altogether require the same Laws for if the Water be poured forth into 2 that it may flow towards E the greatest quantity will be in the place E a little less in the place near to that and yet far less in the place nigh to that and least of all in E. So also when that water is driven from 2 towards E its greatest quantity and accumulation shall be in the place near to 2 and so much the lesser by how much the place is more remote from 2 but because the Earth is moved round that E may come unto F then at length shall the greatest tumor be in E and the water shall be forced towards H. Therefore the Diagram of Cartesius with the Demonstration it self ought to be changed that the tumor may be in the place near unto the very 2 that is to that unto which the Moon is vertical What else may be here said we shall handle in our treatise of the consideration of the Cartesian Philosophy Proposition XII In Full and New Moons the general motion of the Sea from the East to the West is more violent also the intumescency of the Sea is found great in most parts but in the quarters the motion is found the least of all and so also in the intumescency In Full and New Moons the motion of the Sea from East to West most violent Experience sufficiently proveth this Proposition for Mariners testifie that the Sea doth foam and swell in New and Full Moons and in the quarters is calm Now it is easily demonstrated according to the Hypothesis of the preceding Propositions for the Moon when it is either Full or New is more near the Earth than at any other time and in the quarters more remote as Astronomers do demonstrate Now when the Moon is more near the Earth that is when that the space B T is less the Celestial matter being hindred more vehemently presseth the water from 2 to 1 because it is more near but on the contrary in the quarters Yet the motion is observed to be more violent in the Full Moons than in the New at least in some places which except you will ascribe to the light of the Moon I see no other cause neither can we otherwise shew why in the Full Moon both Trees and Animals have greater humors than in the New seeing that the Sea is equally augmented in the New Moon Yet that is marvellous that one Twistius a Dutch-man relateth in his description of India concerning the Kingdom of Gazaratt where for many years he dwelt that Cockles Crabs and other shelly Fishes are less fleshy and juicy in the Full Moon than in the New which is contrary to the nature of all Regions Neither is it less admirable that on the shoars near to the mouth of the River Indus in the same Kingdom that the Sea is augmented and swelleth in the New Moons and not far from thence in the Sea of Calicut the increase is in the Full Moon Proposition XIII In the time of the Vernal and Autumnal Equinox or in the Spring and Autumn the intumescency of the Sea is greater than in the other seasons of the year but least in the Solstices In Spring and Autumn the intumescency of the Sea is greatest Cartesius indeed pretendeth to shew a demonstration of this propriety from his Hypothesis but I cannot
apprehend it from his words neither do I see how it can follow from his Hypothesis It is probable that the Sun and general winds do very much contribute to this intumescency of the water and seeing that the Sun in the Aequinoctials doth incumb on the middle of the Sea of the Torrid Zone therefore either he or the winds cause that the Sea then swelleth more than at another time But as concerning the Solstices we must say in a contrary mode or that the same is the cause of the greater intumescency of the Sea in the time of the Aequinoctials either of the Spring or Autumn which is the cause of more frequent rains winds and inundadions in those seasons Proposition XIV In some parts of the Ocean Gulphs and Shoars great is the encrease and decrease of the water in the influx and deflux in other some it is very small in some not discernable and so there is no flux and reflux or intumescency and detumescency The increase and decrease of the water in several parts of the Ocean Those places receive great Augmentation and decrease 1. That are under the Torrid Zone between the Tropicks for then the Moon pressing for the most part is there carried round 2. In places that are directly extended from East to West or nigh the Collateral quarters 3. In those Gulphs that are long and less broad the Augmentation is the more sensible 4. In those places in which few Islands or procurrents adjoyn to the Earth The greatest flux and deflux in the Streight of Cambaja The greatest flux and deflux hitherto observed is that which is in the Streight of Cambaja in one of the inlets of the River Indus and it hath struck many with admiration for the water recedeth to an high distance and that very speedily Whence not without reason the River Indus or the Gulph of Cambaja is thought to be that unto which when that Alexander the Great came and endeavoured to pass his Army over as it is there related the water presently went back and left his Ships a ground hence he went no farther but judged that the Gods had here fixed the bounds of his Expedition with a prohibition of proceeding any farther The cause is the small or narrow and deep depression of the Channel but yet 't is probable there was some other cause Fluv and reflux at Damman At the City Damman in India not far from Surat the Altitude of the water by flux and reflux is varied at two and a half Orygas and the Sea departeth from the shoar the space of half a mile In the Gulph of Cambaja the flux augmenteth the Altitude five Orgyas others say seven which unusual augmentation hath been the cause of the loss of many Ships by unexperienced Mariners for the water falling they have been split on the Rocks No constant time of the flux and reflux in the Streights of Magellan The flux and reflux in the Red-sea In the Gulphs and shoars of the Streights of Magellan no constant time of the flux and reflux is observed for sometimes the water floweth and refloweth in three hours othersome in twelve hours which inconstancy is to be ascribed to the violent irruption of the Ocean into that Streight and from the various agitations of the wind About Malacca also at the Streight of Sunda a notable flux and deflux is observed In the Arabian Gulph or Red Sea some of the Ancients have written that there is so great a reflux as Scaliger writeth that Moses and the Israelites passed over without any Miracle But it is false because the reflux is not there so great as to leave the Channel dry On the Coasts of China the flux and reflux is very sensible as also at the Isles of Japan At Panama on the Coast of America lying at the Pacifick Ocean the Sea is very much exalted The Sea at the flux much exalted at Panama and by and by depressed again in the full Moons the flux is so much augmented that water entreth into the Houses of the City Yea in almost all the shoars of the South Sea the Altitude of the water is wonderfully augmented and diminished so that in the reflux the decrease is sensible for two miles In the Gulph of Bengala at the shoar of Sâam the flux augmenteth the Altitude ten foot The flux not perceivable in the Mediterranean Sea But in the Mediterranean Sea which floweth in through the Streights of Gibralter from the West to the East the flux is not perceivable because the scituation is contrary to the quarter into which the Sea is moved and therefore the water of it is little augmented by the flux so that it is not discernable unless in the Gulph of Venice which by reason of its long extension and small Latitude sheweth the flux and reflux when in the other part of the Mediterranean Sea by reason of its notable Latitude that little augmentation and decrease is not discovered Whence this flux and reflux was unknown to the Grecians as also to the Romans in the time of Scipio Africanus And the Grecians as well as the Romans accounted it as miraculous what sometimes they discovered in other places as is manifest from the Expedition of Alexander the Great and of Scipio in the expugnation of Carthage but in the time of Cicero it was known to the Romans Yet some observed it a little at Massilia also at certain Coasts of Barbary it is noted enough The flux and reflux in the Baltick Sea not yet found out In the Baltick Ocean as also in the whole Northern Sea beyond England towards Norway and Greenland the flux and reflux of the Sea is not yet found out as neither in the North Coast of the Pacifick Ocean But the cause is not yet sufficiently known unless you will say that those Seas are remote from the course of the Moon and also that they are extended from the West to the East and North moreover that many Isles and procurrencies of land do hinder These three must be conjoined to impede the flux of the Sea in these places Proposition XV. The flux and reflux of the Sea is a violent motion viz. an impulse but the reflux is a natural motion of the water For the flux is caused by the pression of the Moon or matter between the Moon and the Earth or also because that the Sea doth not remain in that scituation which is received in the flux this is a sign that it was a violent motion But in the reflux the Sea is moved from a more high place to a more depressed place which is the natural motion of water Lemma The place of the Moon being given in the Ecliptick and the Latitude and hour of the day from an Ephemerides or by Supputation or Astronomical observation to find on the Terrestrial Globe the place unto which the Moon at the hour given is vertical also to exhibit all those places of the Earth unto
which the Moon will be vertical that day viz. one after another See Proposition 13. in Chap. 19. The use of this Problem is great yea very necessary in the Doctrine concerning the flux and reflux of the Sea The mode of performing of the same you shall find in the Nineteenth Chapter and the Thirteenth Proposition For there it is more conveniently explained yet the Explication of that Proposition may be anticipated and demonstrated to the studious in this Chapter Proposition XVI In those places of the Sea to which the Moon is vertical the flux and deflux is greatest except that there be other impediments which we have reckoned up in the XIV Proposition And by how much the parts of the Sea are more remote from the place by so much the flux and deflux is lesser other things being equal For because in that place the pressure is greater and the tumour of the water greater which is more vicine to the Moon pressing and the Celestial matter thence followeth that that the Proposition intimateth the objections concerning some other places in the comparison of which the contrary is found are to be excused by the admixtion of other causes Proposition XVII The quantity of the flux and reflux is unconstant in every place and divers on several daies and by so much the greater or lesser by how much the Moon is more remote or near unto that place The Moon every day changeth her place in the Ecliptick For the Moon every day changeth her place in the Ecliptick and so on other daies is vertical to other places and by consequence is more remote from any place or more near Which being observed we conclude from the preceeding Proposition that there is a divers quantity of the flux and reflux in one and the same place on divers daies whether that the diversity be sensible or insensible Proposition XVIII The greatest intumescency of water in any place and term of the flux ought to be when that the Moon doth occupy the Meridian of the place But in many places it is found to be in another scituation of the Moon For then is the Moon most nigh to any place of the Earth when that it is in the Meridian of that place because that the Hypotenusa of a right angled Triangle is lower than the Cathetus Whence it is inferred by the XVI Proposition that when the Moon is in the Meridian See Proposition 16. there ought to be the greatest intumescency and Altitude of water and immediately a decrease to succeed But when the Moon is in the lowest of the Meridian then the narrowest of the vortex of the Earth opposite to it in the upper Meridian and therefore doth effect the same as if that the body of the Moon were present But here ariseth a great difficulty For there are many places and Coasts of the Earth in which we find that the term of the flux is not when that the Moon cometh to the Meridian as the Philosophers held before this age but sooner or later viz. when that the Moon cometh to a certain quarter not Cardinal and this quarter is not constantly observed but in new and full Moons for the most part the greatest intumescency is and the begining of a detumescency before the Moon cometh to this quarter or vertical Circle So at London the water is at the highest when the Moon cometh to the quarter which is between the South and West or North and East that is to the South West or North East quarter At the Coast of China in the Port of the City Maccau The greatest flux at the Coast of China observed by a Portugal a certain Portugal Mariner observed the time of the greatest intumescency by this mode The Elevation of the Pole is 22 degrees 20 minutes in the Year 1584 on the 19 of September the Moon was at full then the intumescency or Altitude of the highest water was observed in the morning at ½ or ¼ of an hour past 8. therefore then the Moon was removed from the Meridian 3 ¼ hours Whence the quarter or vertical Circle in which the Moon at that moment of time was is found according to the Problem of the 30 Chapter Anno 1585 on the 16 of February in the full Moon the greatest hight of water was observed at half an hour past a eleven a Clock at Noon Certain observations taken by a Dutch Mariner of the flux of the Sea in many places A certain Dutch Mariner on the daies of the new and full Moon noted the hours of divers places for the term or intumescency of the flux from which I have extracted these At the twelfth hour on the daies of the new and full Moon on the Coast of Flanders at Enchusen in Holland at Horn at Embden in East Freezland at the mouth of the Elve at Eider at the Isles of Jutland and at Dover at England At 45 minutes past 12 at Flushing in Zealand half an hour after one a Clock at the Occidental Coast of the Isle of Wight at Calis at the mouth of the River of Thames at the shoar of Zeland in the mouths of Scald in Mosa and at Gored A quarter after two before the mouth of Scald and the mouth of Mosa At three a Clock at Amsterdam Roterdam Dort in Holland at Newcastle in England at Arment in Flanders in the mouth of the River of Burdeaux in the South Coast of Britain Gallocia Gascoyn Biscay Portugal and Spain and on the Western Coast of Ireland even to Hitland A quarter after four in the evening at Roan in France between Mosa and Rochel in the River of Burdeaux in the Bays of the Spanish Portugal and Gallecian Coast in the South Coast of Britany in France Gascoyn and on the Western Coast of Ireland Half an hour past four from the Texel at the South Coast of Ireland A quarter past five in all the Ports of the Southern Coast of Ireland at Plymouth in England and other Southern places of it even to the Coast of Wales At six in the evening and morning before Hamburgh in the Elbe before Bremen the Texel Antwerpe in the Channel between England and Brabant without Sorlis A quarter before seven in the evening between Fawick and Vaelmuya in the Channel even to Bristol before St. Nicholas and Podessembe even to Waymouth and Hartepole At half an hour past seven in the Haven at the Texel at Kilduyna in the middle of the Channel nigh Plymouth and in the Sea even to the Promontory of the Lizard A quarter past eight in the evening nigh the Isle of Wight in the Channel even to Bevesier without the Fly on the Coast of Holland At nine before the mouth of the River Ems in Freezland before the Fly before the Coast of Freezland at the Eastern Coast of the Isle of Wight At half an hour past ten before the mouth of the River Thames on the Coasts of Normandy and Picardy And at a quarter
past eleven a Clock in the River Thames and other places of England A difficult task to explicate the cause of this difference Now it is a most difficult task to explicate the cause of this so notable a difference and that in all places although it be incumbent on the Philosopher or Geographer Yet it is probable that the various windings of the shoars the scituation of the Coasts in respect of the Sea the obstacles of Islands the mutual meetings of the water the distance of the places from the Lunary way various waies especially those that are constant and general the declining of the shoars and other things do very much conduce to this propriety of the flux For example at the Port of London in the Coast of England the water encreaseth until the Moon cometh unto the quarter of the South-West viz. when it declineth from the Ecliptick towards the South for then water begineth to flow back again but not when the Moon cometh to the Meridian Therefore we say that whilst the Moon moveth to the Meridian of London towards Brazile or from Brazile towards London the Sea doth not recede from London but is yet augmented by reason that the Coasts of America unto which the Ocean is moved by the Moon do repel that water towards England and this hapneth therefore because it affordeth not a passage for the water But why when the Moon is declining from the Ecliptick towards the North is the greatest Altitude of the water and the begining of the decrease observed before the Moon cometh to the Meridian viz. in the North-East I answer that this cometh to pass because that the Moon is then far more near to England than when it declineth from the Ecliptick towards the South and therefore then it more swiftly filleth but the cause why then the flux is no longer protracted even until the Moon cometh to the Meridian may be by reason that the Moon forceth the Sea more near the Sea of Mexico and Hudsons Streights where there is found a great intumescency and detumescency On the Coast of China we therefore say that the intumescency doth anticipate the appulse of the Moon at the Meridian by reason that a continnual East wind driveth that Sea towards the West But these allegations I leave to be farther examined by the searchers of nature But for the finding out of the true cause it is altogether necessary that we acquire accurate observations how the flux and reflux of the Sea is made in divers places viz. in what vertical the Moon is in that flux how the quarter is varied in a divers place of the Moon as in the full and new especially in those places where the Moon becometh vertical also in those which directly respect the East West and North. Also that must be diligently observed how the flux is here made in those hours of the day whilst that the Moon being in the North part of her Circle hath not the Sea placed vertically under her but Lands in a long tract viz. from Cambaja and China even to the Occidental Coasts of Africa For because then that it doth not directly press the water it being depended over the Mediterranean places I thence suppose that some variety must happen to this motion Also what then it doth whilst the Moon ruling in the South Hemisphere passeth over the Mediterranean parts of Brazile or Southern America Without these observations we shall hardly arrive at the true cause neither shall we neglect this argument Proposition XIX The Sea floweth to most Coasts in six hours and twelve minutes and refloweth also in so many hours The Sea in few places floweth in more hour and refloweth in less In very few places it floweth in more hours and refloweth in less and on the contrary in very few places it floweth in fewer hours and refloweth in more yet so that the time of the flux and deflux viz. between the two greatest intumescencies together make twelve hours with 24 â
minutes and two such times make 24 hours with about 50 minutes 48 ¾ and therefore on every day the greatest intumescency falleth out later almost by an hour because that the Moon almost an intire hour returneth more slowly to the same Meridian every day We have sufficiently explained the first part of the Proposition in the Demonstration of the Eleventh Proposition although in this demonstration we have taken the Altitude of the Sea the Moon possessing the Meridian but in this Proposition by reason that in the proceeding we have shewed that in many places that Altitude doth happen the Moon being constituted without the Meridian we do not reckon in them the hours from the time in which the Moon possesseth the Meridian but for that time in which the Moon occupieth that vertical place in the which when that the Moon is it is manifest that the greatest intumescency is Yet in these places the period of the increment ot decrement doth not exactly observe these twelve hours witih twenty four minutes or twenty four hours with fifty minutes because that the Moon by reason of its various and mutable distance from the vertex either in more or fewer hours returneth to the same vertical which difference notwithstanding is not great Although therefore in all places the flux and reflux be compleated almost in twelve hours and twenty four minutes when that there are no tempests also in most this time is equally divided between the flux and reflux so that in six hours it floweth and in so many refloweth yet in some places the time of the flux is unequal to the time of the deflux viz. more or less The flux and reflux of the Ocean at the River Garumna in France The Ocean entereth Garumna a River in France in seven hours and resloweth in five So at the Port of Maccoa on the Coast of China the flux is in nine hours and refloweth in three yea in less if that the Eastern winds blow On the contrary at the Coast of Zenega a River of Aethiopia the Sea floweth in four hours and refloweth in eight The causes of these differences are difficult Some refer them to the swift and valid efflux of the Rivers or also to a simple efflux for therefore the Shoar of Garumna discovereth the flux in seven hours because that its strong motion retardeth the flux but yet assisteth the deflux therefore the Sea refloweth in five hours Others have added those hours to the flux by reason that the Sea reflowing from the more Northern place hindreth least the Sea should hinder the egress from Garumna but rather be more forced on it But I suppose therefore to be by reason that Garumna poureth forth it self by a strong Motion from its inlet or mouth into the Ocean for some distance this efflux is prohibited on some part from the Sea and so the water of Garumna is at a stand also for some space before that the Sea by reason of the Moon entreth its
for some months are less frequent or not at all For either they perished by Shipwrack being carried or forced on the Rocks that lay hidden beyond all expectation or else the Seamen perished by famine being detained in this Gulph But yet this Motion is not common to the whole Aethiopick Ocean but only to that part which adjoyneth to the Coast of Guinee even to that Gulph or Bay for in the Sea it is not found to be above the distance of fourteen miles from the shoar at the distance of one degree from the Aequator Therefore Mariners sayling by those Coasts are very cautious not to approach over near unto them so that they may Steer their Course according to their minds and the scituation of the appointed place Now it is difficult to find out the cause of this literal motion especially seeing that the neighbouring Ocean is moved by a contrary way from the East to the West yet two things may be said 1. That the Ocean being repulsed from the Coasts of America floweth back somewhat towards the East and because that the Aethiopick Ocean is extended in a long tract to the Gulph of Fernando Poo therefore it refloweth into this which yet is only discovered at the shoars not in the deep Ocean because in this the contrary motion rendreth it insensible but towards the shoar the Sea is moved more violently and therefore is chiefly discovered in that Bay of Fernando Poo because that the Sea by reason of the Rivers flowing in with a great violence is repelled from the Shoars of the rest of Africa as of Congo 2. There may be a certain subterraneous Channel in this Gulph of Fernando Poo into which the Sea may fall and attract the rest of the Ocean with it Proposition XXIV The second peculiar perpetual motion The second peculiar motion of the Sea About Sumatra the Sea floweth from the South towards the North into the Gulph of Bengala and that with a violent motion so that it is probable that by the violence of the Sea this Gulph was made and that the Cherfonesus of Malacca was separated from India Whether the cause be that the Ocean which tendeth towards the West be forced from so many Islands and the Promontory of the Land of Magellan so that it should be carried violently flowing towards the North or whether a subterraneous Channel be in that Gulph is to be questioned Yet I suppose it is not directly carried to the North but to a Collateral quarter which declineth towards the West Yea this very same motion is found between Java and the Land of Magellan Therefore the Dutch sayling towards the Indies direct their Course to that procurrent part of the Land of Magellan or the South Continent and then sail from the South towards the North viz. to Java Proposition XXV The third special perpetual motion of the Sea The third special perpetual motion is observed between the Isle of Madagascar and the Promontory of Good Hope especially on the Coast of Africa between Terra de Natal and this Promontory of Good Hope This motion is found from the quarter of the North-East to the South-East and from the North to the South according to the extension of the Coasts so vehement that Ships with a stiff gale can hardly overcome it and hold the contrary course to Madagascar On the contrary those who sail from Canali into Madagascar and Africa towards the Promontory of Good Hope without any help of the winds are carried unto it by the motion of the Sea alone I suppose the cause to be the forcing of the Ocean by a general motion to the Coasts of Africa where it findeth a passage For this motion is not found in the middle of the Ocean or that part removed from the shoars between India and Africa from a Collateral quarter But the Ocean is moved from the East to the West Proposition XXVI The fourth special perpetual motion The fourth special perpetual Motion is in the Pacifick Ocean on the Coast of Peru and the rest of America where the Sea is moved from the South to the North questionless the cause is a perpetual South wind which is found to predominate on those Coasts as we have shewed in our Chapter of Winds In the Sea remote from the Coasts this motion is not discovered neither this wind Proposition XXVII The fifth special perpetual motion The fifth special perpetual motion is observed in the Sea on the Coasts of America from the Promontory of St. Augustin in Brazile to the Isles Antilles in the Gulph of Mexico towards Florida that is from the South to the North. Peradventure the cause is that the Ocean being carried by a general motion towards Brazile is repelled and by reason that a more free and broad passage is granted towards the North thither is carried The like motion is observed in the mouth of the Streight of Manilla near the Phillippin Isles So in Japan a most strong motion proceedeth forwards from the Port of Xibuxia towards Arima Proposition XXVIII The sixth special perpetual motion of the Sea The sixth special perpetual motion is in the Streight Le Maire where the Mariners of the Prince of Nassau found the Sea to be carried from the West into the East But one observation sufficeth not especially seeing that Le Maire writeth the contrary More special motions are found in the parts of the Ocean at or near the Coasts but as yet they are not accurately enough observed or described Proposition XXIX Vnto the special perpetual motions of the parts of the Ocean also those do pertain which great Rivers cause where they exonerate themselves into the Sea So on the Coast of Africa Loango Congo for ten or twelve miles from the shoar is a strong motion of the Sea from the Coasts towards the West because many Rivers amongst which is the great River Zaire cast themselves with a violence into the Sea The River Zaire casts it self with a violent motion into the Sea and so repel the Sea which motion is helped by the general motion Therefore some daies are required that Ships may touch those Goasts although they may be distant only one or two miles from them So at the Isle Lamon adjacent to the Coast of China the Sea is moved from the shoar towards the East contrary to the general Motion which is from the East towards China this contrary Motion is caused by the impetuous flux of the great River Thoucoan in China but in the Sea more remote from China this motion is obstructed by the general Motion neither is it discovered beyond the Isle of Branco Hitherto concerning the special perpetual motions a little must be subjoyned concerning the special fixed and anniversary motions Proposition XXX Great is the variety of the special ceasing or periodical motions and those periodical fixed and anniversary motions do all almost arise from anniversary and stated winds And stated or fixed winds of one
place may make the motion of the Sea fixed in another place The flux of the Sea in divers places at certain times So between the Isle Celebes and Madera when that the motion is West viz. in December January and February the Sea floweth to the South East or a more near Collateral wind than the East So at Java in the Streight Gallappa when the motion is West viz. in May the Sea floweth towards the East contrary to his general Motion At the Isle of Ceilan from the middle of March to October the Sea floweth towards the South on the rest of the Months towards the North viz. because that in those Months the North winds are frequent in others the South winds Between Cochin and Mallacca the Sea floweth with a Westernly motion from April to August contrary to the general motion towards the East then the rest of the time towards the West the winds assisting the general motion the Sea floweth here with so great a noise that those who know not the same suppose Rocks to be there against which the waters beat so for some months after the 15 of February the Sea is moved from the Maldivian Isles towards the East and India contrary to the general motion At the Coast of China and Camboja in October November and December the Sea is moved towards the North-West but in January towards the South-West with a very swift course to the Sands de Champa so that they seem to exceed the celerity of a stone that is slinged At Pulo Cato even unto Varella on the coast of Camboja when motions or winds do not blow the swift motion of the Sea is towards the South but the motions or winds move towards another quarter On the Coast of the Gulph of Bengala from Patana to the Promontory of Malacca in November and December a swift course of the Sea is observed towards the South In a motion or wind from China to Malacca in June July and August there is a vehement motion of the Sea from Pulo Cato to Pulo Cambir on the Coast of Camboja Many more Examples but less accurately consigned are to be read in the Journals of the Mariners At the Coast of Aguada de san Bras not far from the Promontory of Good Hope this is peculiarly observed that the Sea is always moved from the East to the West towards the land so much the more vehemently by how much the Occidental wind opposite unto it is more violent Questionless some adjacent Coast higher than it is the cause of it Proposition XXXI The circular motions of the Sea are threefold The cirçular motions of the Sea termed Whirlpools and Vortices are threefold For some only move the water in a round othersome suck in the water and in certain hours let it forth again and others suck it in but cast it not forth Although without doubt there be a fourth sort in the Channel of the Sea which casteth out and sucketh not in the waters Yet I do not remember that I have read in any Author such a Vortex to be found in the Sea but many are found on the land The Chalcidican Euripus or Vortex is famous in Greece especially by reason of the Fable concerning the death of Aristotle it receiveth water at certain hours and casteth them out in others The Vortex at Norway is the most noted and greatest of all for it is related to be 13 miles in circuit in the middle of it is a Rock called Mouske This Vorago in six hours sucketh in all that approacheth near it as Water Whales laden Ships and in so many hours vomiteth them all out again with a great violence noise and circumgyration of water The cause is unknown Between Normandy and England is a Vorago or Whirlpool unto which Ships are carried with a great swiftness and being near the Whirlpool are repelled back again Proposition XXXII The motion of the Sea which we call a Concussion or Trembling cometh from a spiration or wind which moveth the Earth or Water it self and causeth it to rise Of the concâssion of the Sea and its cause On the Coast of Biscay is a place which the Inhabitants call Capbreton there sometimes the Sea swelleth without any winds so that it seemeth to overflow the shore it self and on a sudden falleth low The like intumescency is found in a Lake of Scotland called Loumond moved by a subterranean wind The Portugals in Anno 1523 in the Sea of Cambaja discovered a trembling of the water for in a great calm as Maffeus writeth all winds being still the Sea on a sudden swelled from the bottom thence the Ships began to roul and to fall foul of one another to their great astonishment Now in this great confusion and disturbance some cast the lead some pumped others more wise bethought themselves of escaping and got barrels on which they might swim but on an instant it was found to be an Earthquake which thus also disturbed the Ships on the Sea as well as the Land Proposition XXXIII Why the Pacifick Ocean is more calm and without great floods or waves and why it is easily moved or rough with a wind The cause without doubt is because its motions towards the West are not hindred by the intercourse of shoars as the Atlantick Ocean is CHAP. XV. Of Lakes Pools or standing Waters and Marishes Proposition I. Definitions Of Lakes A Lake is a quantity of Water in any cavity of a Mediterranean place of a notable amplitude and tract on all sides encompassed with the Land and at the least having a moderate profundity But more properly that is termed a Lake which receiveth in and letteth forth Rivers A Pool is a small Lake Pools which doth never receive or send forth Rivers A Marish is water in a Mediterranean place Marishes here and there having the lands extant and about it or mixed with the Earth Proposition II. Lakes are fourfold Lakes are Fourfold 1. Some neither send forth or receive Rivers and such Lakes if small are termed Pools but if large they are called Lakes 2. Some send forth Rivers but receive none 3. Others receive Rivers and send forth none And 4. some both receive and send forth Rivers and some of those send forth greater than they receive some equal and some lesser Also some send forth a River almost in the same line with that which they received others in another line or to another quarter also some receive more than they send forth some more few and some equal Proposition III. To declare the generation and conservation of those Lakes which neither send forth nor receive Rivers Those Lakes are either great moderate or small Some of the moderate and small perpetually remain so in the Summer and when it hath not rained for a long space are dried up and both these are termed Pools Now it is easy to declare the generation of those that are dried up viz. the plenty of
rain and cavity and depression of the place in which such standing Pools are For if that any place be scituated in the midst of elevated places all the rain-water runeth unto it and so causeth a Pool In India are many Pools So in India there are many Pools or standing-waters made by the industry of the Inhabitants whereof some are in compass a mile and some two encompassed with a Stone-wall which are filled in the Pluvial months that in the Summer months they may furnish those with water who live far from Rivers or Fountains After the like mode small Lakes and Pools are made by the exundations of the Sea and Rivers So the River Nilus and Niger exundating when that they have reflowed leave many Pools behind them which either the Natives fortifie or make that thence they may draw water on the other Months of the year For the same reason in Moscovia Finland Lapland in the Spring Summer and Autumn are many Lakes partly by reason of the shores and partly because of the dissolving of the Snows and Ice But although some Lakes be dried up in the Summer and after a long cessation of Rains we may not thence firmly conclude that they had all their waters from those Rains for they may be dried up As for other Lakes without Rivers that are not dried up their generation may be also referred to the Rains viz. if that they have a profound Channel in which so great a quantity of water collected from Rains may be kept as that the heat of the Sun is not of force enough to consume it all before that another Rain falleth but it is more probable that these Lakes have peculiar Rivulets in the bottom from which they receive so much water as is consumed by the exhalation And this cause alone taketh place in those Pools that are found on the tops of Mountains as in the Mountain Bructerus in Cenisius and others Now it is probable that some of these also were generated long since by a great inundation of Waters and thence conserved by Rivers nay without question some of these Lakes that are near the Sea and also salt had their being from some inundation of the Sea through some passage as the Lake Harlem and others in Holland There are also many salt Lakes in Peru. Not many Lakes without Rivers and those not large Neither is there any great number of these Lakes without Rivers some small ones are found in Moscovia and Finland the Lake or Pool Lychnitis in Macedonia the Lake Appollonia in Mysia one in Carniola called Zrinzee a round one in China another called Hilam in Cochinchina one in Zanhaga one at the City of Mexico twelve Leagues in length All these are small except that in China in comparison of great ones The Lake Parima the greatest Lake There is only one great Lake of this kind in the whole Earth and which exceedeth all others to wit that of Parima in America which is about 300 miles in length from East to West and about an hundred in breadth where broadest yet nevertheless it doth not receive nor send forth any Rivers How it had its original is no mean doubt whether long since caused by the inundation of the Ocean or flowing from some subterranean Fountains or Springs Also whether it be conserved by Rains or from the same Springs It seemeth to me probable that it hath Springs at the bottom that supply as much as the heat of the Sun consumeth Proposition IV. To declare the generation and conservation of those Lakes that neither receive nor send forth any Rivers Of the Generation and Conservation of Lakes that neither receive nor send forth Rivers There is an infinite namber of these Lakes seeing that most Rivers flow from Lakes as from Fountains or Springs especially those that arise in Moscovia Finland and Lapland viz. where there is any cavity in the place of a Spring but not so large as to contain a quantity of runing water then it becometh a Lake thence proceeds a River the water gliding to the adjacent places Neither may we doubt but that these Lakes have their generation and conservation from Springs in the bottom whether it be a true Spring or an apparent Spring viz. Water flowing from another place thither through a subterraneous passage which last appeareth more probable in reference to certain Lakes which immediately send forth great Rivers Of such small Lakes there is a great multitude as I have said as Volga from whence is the first original of the River Volga Odoium from whence floweth Tanais Adac the original of one of the branches of the River Tigris Osera in Moscovia the Spring of the River Sosnam which is discharged into Volga and many other small ones we only reckon up the greatest of most note 1. The famous Lake Chiamy not far from India in the latitude of 31 degrees from which run four Rivers of note magnitude and inundation into the Kingdom of Sian Pegu and the like viz. the Rivers Menam Axa Cosmum and Martavam but some Maps have a very small River which runeth into this Lake 2. The Lake Cincuyhay in China which sendeth forth a great River towards the North which joyned with another entreth China 3. The Lake Titicaca in America meridionalis of 80 miles compass it sendeth forth a great River which terminateth in a small Lake neither is it seen any farther and about this Lake are many Cities and Towns 4. In Nicaragua in America is a Lake so called about four miles from the Pacifick Ocean and 100 miles from the Atlantick into which it runeth in a great Channel 5. The Lake Iroquois in Canada the original of the River of St. Lawrence 6. The Lake Annibi in Asia under the latitude of 61 degrees Proposition V. To declare the generation and conservation of those Lakes that receive Rivers and let out none Of Lakes that receive Rivers and letteth our none Now it is manifest that these Lakes are generated and conserved from those Rivers which they receive and that flow into them For when that Rivers having gone from their spring and arrived in their passage at any noted and ample cavity the water is collected in this and maketh a Lake Now if the Earth at the bottom prove porous it sucketh in the water and transmitteth it the to adjacent Earth or that which I suppose to be more frequent if there be a Subterraneous passage or that such an one be caused by the water through this part of the flowing water is carried away so that on that account the Lake doth not flow over Of these kind of Lakes there is but a small number on the Earth 1. In the preceding Proposition we have said that the Lake Nicaragua sendeth forth a River which endeth in a small Lake this Lake therefore shall be one of this number 2. The Lake Asphaltites in Palestine termed also the Dead-Sea receiveth the River Jordan but sendeth
termed Arms which proceed from a River divaricated into two Channels 7. A Fountain or Spring is water bubling and flowing forwards from a certain place of the Earth 8. A Well is when the water bubleth up but floweth not forwards Proposition II. Torrents and Rivulets may sometimes proceed from a quantity of rain and dissolved Snow From whence Torrents and Rivulets do proceed For in the Mountainous or more elevated parts of the Earth are found many Cavities small Lakes and standing Pools Now if that so great a quantity of water flow into these from the falls of Rain or Snow that they cannot well contain them they overflow and run down on the more depressed places and because that on every year this happeneth it maketh a Channel for it self but sometimes Torrents do flow without any Channel From this cause viz. Rains and the dissolution of Snow many Rivulets are made also Torrents and moderate or indifferent Rivers in those places which have ridges of Mountains in a long tract as the Procurrent of Africa India Peru Sumatra and the like And these Rivulets flow neither in the Summer nor in the night but only in the day Proposition III. Most Rivulets proceed from Fountains But Rivers of a great magnitude have their Original either from the congress of many Rivulets and indifferent Rivers or flow from Lakes and Marshes For no Rivers of any considerable magnitude as the Albis the Rhine do flow from one Fountain but exist from many small Springs or Lakes Rivulets proceed from Fountains But these proceeding from Lakes are augmented by the accession of other Rivers The River Volga or Rha receiveth two hundred and more partly Rivulets and partly indifferent Rivers before that it dischargeth it self into the Caspian Sea and the Danube as many before she flow into the Pontus And although that Pliny and Cardan write that no Rivers flow into the Nile yet experience testifieth the contrary to them that have travelled in Abyssine The Proposition is easily proved by an enumeration of Examples Springs proceed commonly from Hills Mountains The Springs of some Rivulets and Rivers are in Mountains and elevated places and some on a Plane As for the Springs of those Rivers that proceed from Lakes we have said in the former Chapter that those Springs are in the bottom or Channel of the Lakes and that such Lakes are as it were Conduits and effusions about the Spring before that the water floweth in a Channel or in a greater quantity For some Springs are covered with Earth or water others open The Springs on a Plane are of those Rivers from which Tanais and Albis exist in their first tract unto which others do accede It were easie to collect other Examples Cardanus deny ââh these Fountains to be generated in these plane places but to be derived from the vicine Mountains by some subterraneous passage But I suppose that such Springs first make a standing Pool or Marsh For Tanais seemeth not to flow from a Spring but from a Marsh or some less profound Lake Many are the Mountainous Springs of Rivulets as of those of the Rhine Po Danube Borysthenes c. The Nile Wolga and the great River of St. Laurence in Canada flow from a Lake Yet there is one mode by which from one Fountain a great River may proceed viz. if that the Fountain be on an Elevated place but the Channel of the River must be a little higher than the Altitude of the inlet So the flowing water first in a more swift Current then in a more slow is collected in the Channel and in course of time may be a very great River by reason that so much did not flow out in the first generation Proposition IV. Rivers are very much augmented by frequent Rains and dissolved Snow and that in divers seasons and months of the year Rivers are much encreased by rain and snow So in the Region of Peru and Chili some Rivers are so small that they flow not in the night time but only in the day because that then the water floweth from Snow dissolved on the Mountainâ of the Andes through the heat of the Sun So the Rivers both in the Oriental and Occidental Coast of the procurrent of Africa as in congo Angola and the like are bigger in the day than in the night So it is also in the shoars of Malabar and Chormandel in India Yea in those four Regions in Summer time the Rivers are almost dried up and in the Winter or wet season are overflowing So Wolga in the Months of May and June aboundeth with water so that the Lands and Islands are then covered with water in the other Months the Sands will hardly admit a passage over them for Ships that are laden The reason is because that then the Snow is dissolved on the Mountains whence those Rivulets proceed which being more than one hundred do exonerate themselves into the Volga So the Nile Ganges Indus c. are augmented from rains or Snow so that they overflow the Lands But these augments happen in a different season because that they arise from divers causes and divers places for by reason that rains are more frequent in the Winter therefore Rivers are more high at the season except another cause intervene from the dissolution of Snow which sometimes happeneth in some places and Mountains in the Spring in others in the Summer and in others in the intermedial time by reason that the Snow is then dissolved on the Mountains that are adjacent to the Rivulets of these Rivers Moreover some Rivers especially the greater proceed from remote places where it is then Summer when it is Winter in the place through which they flow and those variations cause the swelling of Rivers in divers seasons But most Rivers do so in the Spring because that then Snow is dissolved in most places The variety of these causes must be shewed in the particular description of every River Concerning that peculiar Spring of Japan which floweth every day only for two hours we shall speak in the following Chapter Proposition V. What may be the Original of that water which floweth from Springs Or whence are Rivers generated The cause of water flowing from Springs We have before our eyes the great River Rhine Albis and others the generation of which by reason of their abundance of waters seemeth more admirable than that of Rivulets but we have shewed in the precedent and third Proposition that the water of Rivers partly proceeds from ãâ¦ã and the dissolution of Snow partly from Lakes and partly from the meeting of Rivulets and Rivers Therefore the question is not so much concerning the Rise and Springs of Rivers as the Original and perpetuity of Fountains and Springs The Opinion of Philosophers and Geographers are various The Opinions of Philosophers and Geographers concerning it are various 1. Some think that all the water of Springs of Rivers proceed from Rain or
dissolved Snow And this they take for a sign of it that Rain and dissolved Snow do much augment the Rivers that oftentimes they extend beyond their Channel and overflow Regions also that Rivers do much decrease and some lesser sort of them are altogether dried up when no Rain for a long while in the Summer season hath fallen because that their Channel is not very profound and therefore have collected little water but those that have a deep Channel are not dried up in the Summer by reason that they have gathered so much water from the Rains that fell and dissolved Snow so that all cannot be turned into vapours except by a daily and continual heat 2. Because that there are very few Rivers in those places where there is little rain as in the more inward part of Africa there are few Springs But these allegations resolve not the question because we are not to demand or seek the Original of Rivers but only the Original of the Water of Fountains Therefore those that speak thus have not well considered the sence of the question as we have taken notice before although also the experience that they alledge is not general because that there are Rivers found in places where there is little rain and no snow although it be true in the Region of Peru and Aegypt which they assert Moreover rain moistneth not the Earth above ten foot deep but Fountains spring from a far greater profundity The Opinion of Seneca 2. Others suppose that we should not demand whence the water of Fountains doth arise by reason that water is an Element as much as Earth Air and Fire concerning the Original of which we do not dispute thus Seneca discourseth But other Authours cut in twain this Gordian knot with the Sword of Alexander For it is not enquired after how that water hath a Being but how it cometh to the places of Fountains and not to other places Moreover the Earth doth not so flow forward as Rivers do But for the Air it is false that we should not seek concerning it as they determine 3. Aristotelians follow the opinion of their Master See Aristotle liÌo 1. Chap. 11. who in the whole Eleventh Chapter of his first Book of Meteors endeavoureth to prove that the water of Fountains is generated from Air contained in the bowels of the Earth He alledgeth these reasons 1. Waters are generated from Air above the Earth viz. Rain therefore seeing that Air is in the bowels of the Earth and that there is the same cause of condensation viz. Cold therefore he saith it is absurd for any one to think that water is not produced from Air there 2. Experience testifieth that more great drops that fall are made of small ones and therefore the Original of Rivers must be as it were certain Brooks of water that meet in one part of the Earth for therefore those that make Aqueducts are wont to bring the water down by trenches and small Channels 3. Because that many Springs and those of the greatest Rivers are found in mountanous places very few in Plains or Valleys which is an evidence that the water of Fountains proceedeth from a condensed Air or Vapour which Air and Vapour tend towards higher places and mountainous places are as it were spunges incumbing over lower places Those are the reasons of Aristotle The Opinion of Cardanus 4. Cardanus with others suppose that the water of Fountains proceeds from Rivulets which are generated of watery vapours condensed both within and without the Earth but that these Fountains alone scarce make up Rivers unless assisted by rain or dissolved Snow His Reasons are these 1. If betimes in the morning one view the Mountains they will appear moist 2. Rivers overflow in the morning and so much the more by how much the part of it is more near the Fountain But the perpetual and constant impetus of the water bubling and leaping from the Springs doth not seem to have its Original from so weak and inconstant a cause Neither doth this opinion of Cardanus much differ from that of Aristotle but that Aristotle placeth Air with the generation Cardanus vapours with the generation to be the cause of Springs and indeed small is the difference between Air and vapours 5. Some of the Antients supposed Rains to be coacervated within the Earth in Cavities and thence to break forth as from a mighty belly and that all Rivers sprang from one of them or from some other of them neither that there was any other water generated but what were collected in the winter months into those receptacles they supposed to evade into the multitude of these Rivers and therefore that they flowed more in the winter than in the Summer and that some were continual and some not They added the same cause that we have laid down in the first opinion But Aristotle receiveth this opinion because that more water in one year floweth out from the mouth of the River than the bulks of that whole part of Earth or Land 6. Of Modern Philosophers many as also of the Ancients determined that the Earth again received whatsoever waters flowed out from the mouth of the Rivers into the Sea For the water of the Sea by an hidden passage went under the Earth and is beaten in its passage through divers windings of the Earth and strained through Sand and Chalk which removeth its saltness and so passeth into pure water I also defend this opinion and suppose it true yet so as not to exclude the cause laid down in the first and third place the reasons are these 1. Because more than one thousand Rivers exonerate themselves into the Sea and the greater of them in such an abundancy that that water which they send forth into the Sea throughout the whole year exceedeth the whole Earth as the River Volga into the Caspian Sea and also other Rivers Therefore it cannot otherwise be but that water must be sent forth into many places of the Earth even to the Fountains of Rivers Now if that this were not so we could not possibly imagine how that the Sea should not be augmented unto an immensity or why Fountains should not cease to send forth water Neither may it be objected that so many vapours are elevated from the Sea that are equivalent to the water that the Sea hath received from the Rivers For first only Rain maketh those vapours then again it is most false that so great a quantity of vapours should be elevated from the Sea as are generated from the water which floweth from the Rivers into the Sea Fountains the nearer the Sea are salter than those farther distant 2. This opinion is proved from that to wit that the Fountains near the Sea are salt and brackish and by how much they are nigher to the Sea by so much they are the more salt as on the Coast of Africa especially on the Coasts of Choromaudel in India where no Vines
do grow and where that all Wells are salt In the City of Suez at the Termination of the Red Sea all Wells are salt or brackish and the water two miles distant is somewhat salt So in many Islands in the Sea no Wells of fresh water are found though not so salt as the Sea water it self as in the Isle of St. Vincent and others In Peru in the low Region the Lakes are salt by reason of the vicinity of the Sea Yea in the Oriental Maritimate places the Nuts called Coco Nuts are found somewhat salt Also in the Mediterranean places themselves Fountains of salt water are found as in Lorrain Lunenburgh and the like 3. Because that it is manifest that the Sea emitteth its water through subterraneous passages from the salt Fountains of Lunenburgh where beneath the Earth those Aqueducts full of salt or Sea-water are found 4. Because that digging to a great depth as also in Mines much water is found of which neither the Rain nor the Air can be made the efficient cause How water cometh from the Sea to the places of Fountains so as to become sweet we have now shewed viz. the bottom of the Sea is not every where Rocky or Stony but in many places Sandy Muddy Gravelly Spungy drinking the water of the Sea and by a continuation of the Earth brings it by degrees to a long distance from the Sea where at length the Guttulae unite especially in a narrow space such as are Mountains and make a Fountain in the given place or Cavity but if so be that Cavity be hidden from the Earth then the water so collected either followeth another way wheresoever it be made and so a Fountain seemeth to break forth in another place which yet is not in than place but is a River derived from the former place by a subterraneous passage Or if that the water of that Cavity findeth no way about it self neither by violence can break through the Earth that covereth it then that water is not augmented but what water flowed unto it to have been its encrease that is averted to another place For that is the property of all humid bodies that all their parts and particles are moved towards that place where the deflux is made So if you fill a Vessel with water that the swelling or tumour may be above the brim of the Vessel then all the parts of the extant water have an equal inclination and power of deflux in the vicine part of the brim But yet by reason of the mutual coherence of the particles whose cause is declared in Natural Philosophy if that the deflux be made in one part of the brim all the other parts leave the vicine brim and draw to that part of the brim or they follow where the deflux is made So if you immerge a long crust of Bread into water you shall see the water born upwards and and the part of the Bread that is not immerged to be humid The Sea goeth under the Earth through Caverns Moreover the Sea goeth under the Earth through Caverns from which after the same mode the water may glide or creep forth unless you had rather ascribe it to evaporations which are carried upwards and uniting the drops in a narrow place But because there are many things which may seem to render this opinion less probable these ought also to be considered that it may be evident that they weaken not this assertion laid down Things to be noted 1. The places of Fountains are more elevated than the Superficies of the Sea by reason that most of them are in Mountanous places therefore water cannot flow from the Sea to those places because the nature of water is to move to places more depressed or less elevated as it is manifest from Rivers and the Artifices of Drainers 2. Although the bottom of the Sea be gravelly muddy and sandy so that the water may penetrate it self through its particles yet the reason doth not appear evident enough but that it may more moisten the adjoyning Earth and that which is not so high than to glide upwards to the places of Fountains seeing especially that the Earth is Rocky and Stony as in the Mountains of the Island of St. Helena 3. There is no reason why the water so gliding from the Sea should not break forth in a middle way between the Sea and the Fountain 4. In the most profound Mines none or very little water is found as Thurnheuserus witnesseth 5. This water of the Fountains should be salt because that it doth proceed from the Sea These are the chief Arguments which may seem to weaken the opinion proposed For I pass by those slight ones alledged by others Other Arguments Answered viz. that they suppose that the Sea is not sufficient to supply so many Rivers then again that Rivers then should never be diminished if that were the true cause of Rivers that we have laid down But unto these two the answer is easy because that the Sea again receiveth the water again from the Rivers that it sent forth into the Fountains Then as for the other we have shewed before that the question is not neither do we determine that all the water of the Rivers is from the Sea but only concerning the water of Springs which is not the alone cause of Rivers as we have said already and we also assert that the water of Fountains is augmented from rains and Dew because that these moistening the Earth glide or are drawn towards the places of Fountains Four Other Arguments of great concernment where the efflux of the water is made which we have explained by other Examples We come now to those four Arguments alledged which may seem to carry some weight with them The first is esteemed very valid as being taken from multiplicit experience therefore many solutions are brought and alledged by Learned men First they the most easily discharge themselves who defend the Ocean to be more high than the Earth for so they deny the assertion and they say that this Altitude of the Ocean is the cause of Springs because that Springs are less high than the water in the middle of the Ocean See Olearius his Voyage into Persia Moreover Olearius in the Description of his Voyage into Persia relateth that he ascended the Mountain that adjoyneth to the Caspian Sea and with an Astrolabe or rather a Gaeodetical Instrument to observe the Elevation of this Mountain above the superficies of that Sea but found none but that the extream superficies of that Sea was seen in the Horizontal Line yea somewhat elevated above it so that the Tumour of this Sea was found a little more high than the vertex of the Mountain on which he made his observation But in truth this solution cannot be admitted of See Chap. 13. because we have shewed in the Thirteenth Chapter that the water of the Ocean is not higher than the Mountains
of which it is probable that the mutation of the height of the Sea availeth much sometimes in this and sometimes in that part by reason of the floods waves or tempest For the water being made higher more presseth the water and promoteth its ingress through the Earth to the Springs And seeing that every day the Altitude of the Sea is augmented and diminished in the parts of the Ocean not only by storms but also by the flux and reflux therefore such a pressure happeneth every day but I question whether this cause can effect much The third Argument answered Unto the third Argument I say that the reason is the disposition of the places and of the Earth it self and as I said that the humour is moved and glideth towards that part where the flux is made neither do I think it needeth any farther explication The fourth Argument Answered The fourth Argument taken from the saltness hath a more difficult solution because that it seemeth not possible that the saltness should be taken away only by transcolation for the saltness of the water consisteth in a double Salt which the Aristotelians never observed the one of which the Chymists aptly call fixed the other volatile Salt And the fixed Salt may indeed be separated from the marine water as well by continual transcolation as by coction and distillation of the water but the volatile Salt because it is spirituous is immediately advanced with the water neither can it be separated by frequent and often repeated distillation Therefore it is hard to give a mode by which this volatile salt spirit in its passage between the Sea and the Fountain may be separated from the Sea water Yet in the mean while these will suffice for the solution 1. Although we have not discovered the mode and artifice by which this volatile salsitude may be separated from the Sea water yet we must not deny but that it may be separated for by nature we find it separated viz. for fresh showers fall into the Ocean which yet were generated of the vapours taken up from the Sea 2. Those particles of Salt water penetrating the Earth before they flow to their Fountain are mixed here and there with other waters proceeding there from rain or vapours and so that small saltitude that they yet had is rendred altogether insensible 3. It is not true that the salsitude is altogether insensible in all Springs because that some Fountains are salt as we said before other-some brackish a little as those two miles from the City Suez and in places less remote from the Sea Therefore there is need of a long transcolation and gentle evaporation to separate the water from the volatile Salt and by this artifice we make Sea water less salt and such also is the generation of rain water which therefore is not salt or at least less salt For it is certain that sometimes saltish kinds of rain do fall into the Sea Therefore the waters of Fountains proceed partly from the Sea or subterranean waters partly from Rivers and Dew that moisten the Earth But the water of Rivers partly proceedeth from Springs and partly from Rain and Snow Proposition VI. Certain Rivers hide themselves in the midst of their passage under the Earth and in another place rise up again as if they were new Rivers Of Rivers which in the midst of their passage hide themselves under the Earth and rise again The most celebrated of them are 1. The River Niger which meeting the Mountains of Nubia is observed under them and cometh sorth again from the other Occidental quarter 2. Tigris having passed the Lake Arethusa meeting the Mountain Taurus is hidden in a Cave and floweth out on the other side Then when it hath passed the Lake Thospites it is again obscured in subterranean Caverns and then after it hath thus run the space of about six German miles it breaketh forth again 3. About Arcadia in Peloponnesus many such Riverets are to be found as Aristotle writeth in his first Book of Meteors Chapter Eleventh 4. Alpheus a River of Achaia is absorbed by the Earth The Grecians write that it keepeth its course under the Sea and beneath the Earth even unto Sicilia where they will have it to emerge on the Coast of Syracuse and to be that River that is called Arethusa in Sicilia Now this they especially collected from this viz. that Arethusa in Sicilia every fifth Summer cast up the dung of those Beasts at that time when the Olympian Games were celebrated and the dung and garbage of the slain Victims were cast into Alpheus Therefore being carried with a direct Current they were cast up in Sicilia 5. The River Guadiana between Portugal and Biscay in times past called Anas wholly obscureth it self at Medelina and about 8 German miles further discovereth it self again 6. Dan which flowing with the River Jor maketh Jordan breaketh forth some miles from its Fountain Phiala Straw or rushes being cast into the same are found and discovered in the Fountain or proruption of the River Dan. The Reasons why these Rivers hide themselves under the Earth and again emerge are 1. The obstacle of a more elevated place than the Channel of the River 2. Either perchance some cavity existing in the Earth or some inconstant matter which easily giveth place to the gliding River There are also other Rivers which hide themselves under the Earth but do not again emerge as we shall shew in the following Propositions Proposition VII Most of the great and indifferent Rivers as also a great part of the lesser do exonerate themselves into the Sea or a Lake and the place where this exoneration is made is termed the Mouth of the River Some Rivers have one some three and some more such Mouths Some of the Rivers of indifferent magnitude as also the lesser sort discharge themselves into greater Rivers the others either stagnate or are sucked up by the Earth Most Rivers both great and small lose themselves in the Sea or in Lakes Concerning the greater Rivers the thing is evident by the Example of the Rhine the Danube the Wolga and such like For the Danube is exonerated into the Euxine Sea by seven Mouths the Wolga hath at least seventy Outlets or Mouths the Nile hath seven and where it overfloweth more The cause why greater Rivers do exonerate themselves into the Sea is their abundance of water and vehement course Now why they have more outlets than one there is a twofold reason for the same 1. The abundance of water 2. The generation of Sands and ridges in the mouths which in progress of time was so augmented that they become either part of the Land or Island and so cause that the River gliding is divided into two branches And when many such ridges are generated the River is divided into many branches or one mouth into many but then for the most part the mouths are carried forwards and the Sea recedeth from
and there are found Whirlpools in a River places more depressed and on the contrary ridges and little hills thence it cometh to pass that one part of the Channel although more removed from the Springs is higher than the other part of the Channel which is more nigh the Fountain and yet notwithstanding the water floweth from this to that because that quantity of water floweth into the places depressed that the superficies of it becometh higher than the little hillocks or ridges or the vicine patts which being more elevated lie towards the mouth And there is scarce any River to be found whose Channel hath not these inequalities especially in the Nile and Wolga these ridges do abound A Cataract what And where the water falleth from a higher place to a more depressed part of the Channel if the depression be great the place is termed the Cataract of the River where the River runeth downwards with a great violence Such Cataracts great Rivers have especially the Nile For the Nile in two places of his Channel falleth down between the Mountains with that noise and rapidness that the Inhabitants are reported to be deafned by the same Wolgda also a small River in Moscovia not Wolga hath two Cataracts near Ladoga So the Zaire a River in Congo six miles from the shoar hath a Cataract where it falleth from a Mountain also the Rhine at Belefilda and Scaffusia falleth with a great noise But Drainers have observed that if the bottom of the Channel be depressed one pass in 200 paces it will hardly be navigable by reason of its celerity Seeing therefore that all great Rivers are Navigable we infer That the depression of the Channel is no greater than one pass or mile in 200 but particular Cataracts and Whirlpools are excepted Now this depression of one part of the Channel beneath the other part is termed Libramentum and the depression of the mouths of the River beneath the place of the Fountain is termed the Libramentum of the River Proposition XI Why Rivers have or acquire a greater Latitude in one part of them than in the other Of the Latitude of Rivers The causes are fourfold 1. If that the bank or shoar be more low in this part than in that 2. If that the Earth of the shoar be less hard and coherent as not being sufficient to resist the violent access of the River which sometimes proceedeth from the winds or plenty of water 3. If that the Channel on that part be less profound or hallowed or have ridges And 4. If that it flow from any Cataract into that part Proposition XII The Channels of Rivers become more or less depressed sometimes in this and sometimes in that part They become less depressed or elevated and not so hollow 1. If that Ridges be generated 2. If that the River become more broad on that part 3. If that the flux become less swift The depression or cavity of the Channel is augmented if that the flux of the River be more vehement and swift especially from some Cataract or between the narrownesses of the shoars more especially if that the whole bottom consist of earth less coherent Proposition XIII Why some Rivers run with a more swift current and others with a more slow And why one and the same River is carried with a swift current in one place and with a slow in another which is observed of the Rhine in many places Of the motion of Rivers The causes are 1. The Altitude of the Spring 2. The depression in the parts of the Channel or bottom especially in the mouth for if that the bottom be depressed one mile in two hundred Drainers have observed that the water is so swiftly moved that there is great danger in sailing For where there are Cataracts there the Rivers rush with a mighty violence and therefore Torrents are carried so furiously because that they flow from Mountains 3. The streightness of the Channel and profundity joyned with an abundant quantity of water as when Rivers pass between two Mountains or procurrent Lands Rivers famous for their swift course are the Tigris Indus Danube Yrtiis Malmistra that floweth with so great a noise that it may be heard a great distance off Proposition XIV The mouths of Rivers may be by so much the more easily obstructed by how much they are the more broad and by how much they are the deeper or less depressed and by how much there is less quantity of water and the flux is less swift and vehement For these causes make the River to be carried with a lesser violence neither doth it thrust forth the Terrestrial matter which is collected in its mouths but rather suffereth it to sink Proposition XV. Very few Rivers are carried in a direct course from the Spring to the Out-let many seek divers quarters in their flux and some flow with many windings The course of Rivers from the Spring The cause seemeth partly to be the industry of men partly the motion of the water partly the interposition of a ridge or bank in its direct course Winding Rivers are 1. Rio de Orellana in Brazilia making innumerable windings so that its Passage or Channel is reckoned to be above 1500 miles when in a direct line from the spring of it to the mouth are only 700 miles 2. The River De Madres in Anatolia which hath 600 windings 3. The River Toera arising in Siberica floweth with so many curvatures or windings and the Russians and Siberians when they sail in it carry the Boat or small Vessel and its lading by land from one winding to another to avoid greater expence Proposition XVI Whether the Lakes through which some Rivers do seem to pass or to enter into and to go out from be caused by Rivers or whether they have their peculiar Springs and augment the water of Rivers also whether that a River flowing from a Lake be the same with that which floweth in Of the cause of Lakes All Rivers have not such Lakes but some only Nubia a River of Africa hath five the River Niger four Rhodanus the Lake Lemanus c. Concerning those Lakes we have spoken in the preceding Chapter viz. that a River going forth must be compared with that which entereth in if that which goeth forth be greater than that which entereth in there will be peculiar Springs in the bottom of the Lake which causeth that River but if that a lesser or at least no greater goeth forth this Lake is made and conserved by the River entering in and the cause or original of its generation was the latitude and cavity or depression of the Channel and a Lake may be made from any River as we have said in the preceding Chapter Although the River going forth be situated almost in a direct line with the River entering in yet those two Rivers shall be accounted one River or the parts of one River viz. when that which goeth forth is
greater than that which entereth in for if it be lesser or no greater I think we ought not to question whether that which goeth forth be the same with that which cometh in Other Notes or Signs are in some as the Rhodanus entereth the Lake Lemanus and again goeth forth and yet causeth not that Lake which is discovered besides other tokens from the colour which this River beareth contrary to the Lake neither doth the Rhine cause any Lake but is produced and conserved from waters bubling under the earth yet I do not propose these as undoubted Proposition XVII Most Rivers are by so much the broader by how much they are near to their mouth or removed from their Spring and great is their Latitude in their Mouths or Outlets The Mouths of Rivers broader than at their Springs The cause is 1. Because other Rivers enter into that which exonerateth it self into the Sea and so the quantity of water is augmented 2. Because the Channel is less depressed in the parts nearer the mouth 3. Because that the water is forced back by the wind blowing from the Sea from the mouth to the Fountain which violence is only discovered in the parts near to the mouth not in those remote and near the Fountain 4. The Sea it self when such a wind bloweth entereth the mouth and rendereth it more large and broad by vehement agitation And by so much the outlets are larger and broader in great Rivers by how much they are the fewer Great are the mouths or outlets of the River Maragnon in Brazilia of St. Laurence in Canada of the Zaire in Africa of Rio de la Plate in Brazilia for this River is carried into the Sea by an out-let of 40 miles as some have observed or as others of 20 miles only And I suppose those that write of 40 miles comprehend the other mouths of the River together Those who have been in Congo relate that the mouth of the Zaire is 28 miles and these Rivers sending forth such a large quantity of water overcome and obscure both the salt taste of the water and the motion of the Sea towards the shoar and that unto 10 or 12 miles in the Sea Proposition XVIII The water of Rivers carrieth with it many particles of various Metals Minerals Sands of oyly or fat Bodies Rivers in their course carry various things with them Some Rivers carry gold that is sands mixed with some grains of gold and such are 1. some in Japan 2. In the Islands of Lequeo not far from Japan 3. A Riveret called Arroe in Africa which springeth in Monomotapa from the foot of the Mountains of the Moon in which Mountains there are golden Mines and it floweth into Magnice a River in Soffalae 4. In Guiney where the Negroes separate these grains from the sand and sell it or exchange it with the Europeans for Toyes or slight Commodities 5. In the Riverets about Mexico grains of gold are also gathered up especially after showers of Rain Which must be understood of all these Riverets For except in the times of showers scarcely any or very little is found 6. In Peru. 7. In Sumatra 8. In Cuba 9. In Hispaniola and other adjacent Isles 10. In Guiana a Province in America 11. In the Rivers of Caribana great grains are found after showers 12. Many Riverets and Springs are found in the Regions about the Alpes in Germany especially in the Province of Tirol from the water of which gold and silver is extracted although nothing of grains be conspicuous in them because they carry very small Particles or Atomes The Rhine also carrieth golden clay in many places as also the Abbis In times past the River Tagus was famous for rowling down Sand-gold but at this day no such are found in it neither do I remember that any River in Europe is celebrated for such riches Also in Hassia at this time a small River is reported to be found in the sands of which were grains of gold but I have read no Author worthy of credit concerning it No Silver Rivers or Riverets are taken notice of by Writers yet I doubt not but that there as many or more Riverets which carry grains of gold but because they are not so easily discovered from the sand and no great gain can be obtained therefore it hath not yet been observed by any The same is also the cause why we meet with no mention of those Riverets that carry grains of Iron Copper Tin except of very few of which questionless there are a great number the admirable effects of which being discovered men admire and are amazed and vulgar Philosophers fly to an occult quality Let us only cast an eye on that River in upper Germany A strange River in Germany which changeth Iron into Copper as the Vulgar think so that if you hang an Iron shoe in it you will draw it out Copper But the Iron is not changed into Copper as is vulgarly supposed but the grains and particles of Copper and Vitriol that are in this River corrode the Iron by the assistance of the motion of the water and the particles of the Iron being removed those of the Copper succeed in their places This the Modern Physicians that are skilful in Chymistry have learned by another experiment Much less are the Riverets that are impregnated with many particles of kinds of earth and salts observed But we shall explain in the following Chapter the Mineral and Metallick Springs From this admixture of various particles proceedeth the great diversity of waters in Rivers and Wells The water of some if that you use it to boyl Meat maketh it black which is a sign that it is impregnated with Iron neither are Pease so easily softned as when they are boyled in other water which is somewhat more fat Of divers waters the same or like Beer cannot be made Now the Albis is of the number of these fat ones as I may so say The cause of this variety is to be sought from the variety of the Lands through which the River runeth which are either stony gravelly or metallick And experience testifieth that Rivers whose water is fat do run through clayie Lands so all the places that adjoyn to the Albis are fruitful Proposition XIX The waters of most Rivers differ in colour gravity and other qualities The waters of most Rivers are of different qualities For some waters are black some inclining to black some inclining to red some to white And this diversity of them is chiefly noted when that two Rivers do meet for we may discover for many miles those waters where now they exist in the same part of the Channel From whence also 't is manifest that they differ in gravity when that one rather sinketh to the bottom of the Channel than the other although this is made more manifest by the examination by weight The water of the Ganges is accounted the most wholsome and the most light and
fruitful by its fat water Proposition XXI To explain how Springs or Fountains break forth Of the breaking forth of Springs and Fountains In the fourth Proposition we have shewed whence the water ariseth that floweth from Fountains Now here we demand by what force that water collected in the Earth is thrust forth seeing that it seemeth not possible to be done without a violent removing of the Earth But the causes are various which make way for a Spring in any place 1. If that in any place there be a certain cavity the water distilleth into that without the help of any other cause when that by creeping it cometh into it and then in course of time maketh greater passages for it self until that cavity being filled it floweth out and maketh a River The same also hapneth without a cavity if that the Spring be on the top of a Mountain Also for this reason frequent Springs are found in Woods and shady places For the Rain-water moistneth the Earth and because it is not extracted by the heat of the Sun and an open and free Air by degrees it allureth to it self the hidden water of a future Fountain 2. A way is prepared and the Earth removed by the Spirits which are admixed with the waters yet in the Earth also the rarefaction of water in the Earth by which it requireth the larger place For the Waters whilst that yet they are hidden within the Earth carry many Spirits Also Subterranean fires add not a little to this 3. Oftentimes Fountains are brought to light by showers for showers do render the Pores of the Earth more ample and large when that they conjoyn with the water of the hidden Fountain and so this followeth that by reason of the mutual conjunction and coherency 4. Sometimes Springs are opened by an Earthquake so an Earthquake sent forth the River Ladon 5. Sometimes they are discovered by the Industry of Men by digging the Earth 6. Many Fountains have been discovered by Animals which are wont to dig up the Earth with their Snouts so a Hog first discovered the first Salt Spring in Lunenburgh for when he had rooted up the Earth and made a gutter the water spouted out which filling the gutter the Hog according to their custome lay down in it then when he arose and that his back was dry some discovered a very white colour on him which when they had more accurately contemplated they found it to be white Salt then they went to the Spring and from thence forwards many more were sought and found out from which the City obtaineth almost âll its riches and splendor And in Memorial thereof the Hog was quartered and smoak-dried and is kept at this very day in the Palace of Lunenburgh to be seen Proposition XXII A place being given in the Earth to enquire whether a Spring or Well may be made in it See Vitruvius in the Eighth Book of his Architecture See Vitruvius Lib. 8. Cap. 1. Chap. 1. At this day we perform the same by digging up the Earth oftentimes to a great depth and for the most part veins or heads of Springs or Wells or the Wells and Springs themselves are found Proposition XXIII A place being given to make a Spring or Well in it if that it be possible to be made We will alledge the words of Vitruvius as being a man excellently skilled in these affairs See Vitruvius Cap. 7. seeing that we never used our selves to this kind of Exercise In his Seventh Chapter thus he speaketh Reason must not be contemned in digging of Wells but the natural reasons of things are to be considered with sharpness of wit and great prudence by reason that the Earth hath many and various things within it for it is compounded as other things of four Principles and the first is Terrene and hath from the humidity of the water Fountains also heats whence proceed Sulphur Alom Bitumen and gross Spirits of Air which being thick when by the fistulous intervenings of the Earth they come to the place where the Well is dug and find men digging by their natural vapour they stop up the Animal spirits of those that work at their Nostrils so that those that fly not quickly away are there choaked Now to avoid this we must thus act Let a Candle be lighted and let down and if that it continueth burning you may descend without danger but if that the light be extinguished by the force of the Vapors then let Aestuaries be dug on the right and left hand near the Wâll so as by the Nostrils the Spirits will be dissipated When those are so explicated and that you are come to the water let the structure be so senced that the veins be not stopped But if that the places should prove hard or that the veins shall not be altogether at the bottom then assistance must be taken from the coverings of Plaster-works Now this must be observed in Plaster-work that the roughest and purest Sand be gotten that the Cement be broken with a Flint that the most vehement Chalk be mixed with the Mortar so that five parts of Sand answer to two of Chalk or Lime Let the Cement be added to the Mortar of it let the Walls in the depressed trench unto the measure of the future altitude be spaged the Bars being made of Iron The Walls being plaistered let that which is Earthy in the midst be evacuated to the lower measure or libration of the Walls and the bottom being levelled let the Pavement be plaistered with the same Mortar unto the thickness that is appointed Now these places if they shall be made double or treble that they may be transmutated by the percolations of the water will make the use of it far more wholsom for the Mud when that it hath found a place to sink in the water becometh more clear and will keep its tast without any scent if not you must of necessity add Salt and extenuate it Proposition XXIV To prove whether the Water of a Spring be wholsom Of Spring-water whether it be wholsom or not Concerning this Vitruvius thus writeth Their probations must be thus looked after If that they flow and be open before that they begin to be drawn look on them and observe of what membrature they are what Inhabitants dwell about those Fountains whether they be of strong Bodies of good colours not lame blear or sore-eyed if so the Waters are very excellent Also if that a new Spring be dug and the water be put into a Corinthian Vessel or any other kind made of Brass and if it causeth no stain it is then most excellent water Also if that that water be heated and afterwards setled and poured forth and that no Sand or Mud be found in the bottom that Water is also very good Also if that Roots put in that water be quickly boiled they shew the water to be good and wholsom Also that the water in the Fountain be clear
participations of Minerals are to be applied to Vitriol Sulphureous and Mercurial waters and the like and more especially to these to wit to Salt Vitriolate and Sulphureous because in these Nature it self doth exhibit this fourfold variety I doubt whether that Corporeal waters of a mixed subtilty do exist Spirituous Metallick waters are very rare but Sulphureous and Salt waters are frequent But the Corporeal and Spirituous because these sorts of Metals are both found in many places of the Earth and also in a greater quantity and easily suffer their particles to be gnawed off they send out also frequently a fume and vapour We will explain by one Example this fourfold variety of participation and that in Gold 1. In the preceding Chapter and the sixteenth Proposition we have enumerated those Riverets which carry grains of Gold and with this Treasury make glad the Natives such are many in the Earldom of Tirol and the places adjacent and we have said that the Rhine it self Albis Danube and most great Rivers in some places carry grains of Gold as also of other Metals and Minerals by reason that they receive Golden or Gold-bearing Riverets The Rhine carrieth grains of Gold commixed with Clay and Sand in many places but especially at these 1. Near Curia in Rhetia 2. At Meinfield 3. At Eglinsan 4. At. Secningham 5. At the Town Augst not far from Basil 6. At Norinburgh 7. At Wormes 8. At Seltz 9. At Mentz 10. At Bacherack 11. At Bononia and the like The Reader may see those Gold-bearing Riverets which the Rhine receiveth in Thurnhuserus as also those that the Danube and Albis do receive In the water of this viz. the Albis are found grains of Gold 1. At Leutmeritz in Bohemia 2. At Puru 3. At Dresda in Misnia 4. At Torga 5. At Magdeburgh 6. At the Tower of Lunenburgh fifteen miles from Hamburgh Concerning the Gold-bearing Riverets consult the forecited Book of Thurnhuserus where also you may see those that carry other Mettals and Minerals These Waters are therefore the Corporeal Golden-waters of the first mode viz. those that carry grains of Gold which less properly are termed Mineral or Golden because the Golden-grains are not permixed with the water but are carried down by the rapid Current of the water and the waters themselves are simple or uncompounded 2. Golden Corporeal-waters of a subtile commixtion to wit the Atoms of whose waters are mixed with the Atoms of the Gold as we have said of the Aqua Regia of the Chymists which dissolveth the Gold and uniteth it to it self by Atoms And now because there may be like waters which whether they be carried through Golden-lands or Mines may gnaw off and dissolve some Golden-Atoms of it with Earthly ones such Golden-waters many Riverets seem to be which Thurnhuserus writeth to participate of Gold and reckoneth them up in the description of the Danube Rhine and other great Rivers 3. The Golden Spirituous-waters are very few and some of those are they peradventure which Thurnhuserus enumerateth Now such waters are less noted or sensible because Golden-Earth and Mines are very rare and that in a small quantity Moreover where the Mines are a quantity of other Minerals are also together with the Gold whence the water receiveth many more Spirits Yet some Riverets in the high Alpes of Bohemia are said to participate of these Golden-Spirits also in Silesia and the Mountain that they call Fitchtelberg The Pepper-Baths in the Bishoprick of Curia are believed to be impregnated with such a Spirit but by reason of the admixture of other Minerals in greater quantity the waters receive a less sensible quality from it 4. Golden-waters which carry both Atoms of Gold and Spirit are some of the Riverets mentioned by Thurnhuserus We will add the Example of Salt-waters Example of Salt-waters 1. Salt Corporeal-waters viz. which carry the more gross particles of Salt and not accurately mixed they are many and sufficiently known to any person as certain Springs of which Salt is made Hitherto appertaineth the Sea-water if that it be made more gross by the heat of the fire 2. Salt Corporeal subtile-waters which contain the Salt reduced into little particles they are those which when they are most Salt yet withal they are very pellucid and subtile as many salt Springs and tenuous Sea-water although that there be great difference in this subtile commixtion Hitherto appertaineth the Vrin of all Animals 3. Salt Spirituous-waters which contain not the particles of Salt but the spirit of Salt they are such that if you should boyl many Vessels of them yet notwithstanding you should receive no Salt Not a few of these are in Germany and elsewhere but they are rarely found simple 4. Salt Corporeal and Spirituous-waters which have particles of Salt and Spirit Almost all the Corporeal have also some portion of Saline spirit but most of them very little So near the City Saltzinga not far from the Rhine the Fountains are salt the water of which though more salt than other waters yet it affordeth less Salt because its sharp and salt sapor is sharpned by a spirit or volatile Salt that flyeth away in the boyling Hence it is manifest how this fourfold difference of participation is to be applied unto every sort of Mineral waters viz. Vitriolate-waters Alom-waters Lead-waters and the like Proposition V. To reckon up the noted differences of Mineral Waters The noted differences of Mineral Waters In the foregoing Propositions we have explained the true kinds and differences of Mineral waters taken from the very essence of them viz. from the particles of the Minerals which they carry or by which they are impregnated but those differences because they do not so strike the senses and moreover by reason of the various mixture of Minerals communicate various properties to the water wherefore they are less vulgarly known for the denomination of all Bodies ariseth from manifest qualities on the Sense as also doth the celebrity of waters amongst men The explication and cause of which apert qualities and properties must be sought from the inmost composition of things Therefore the noted and famous differences or species of Liquors flowing from the Earth and also known to the Vulgar sort of men are these ten to wit 1. Sowr-waters 2. Bitter 3. Hot 4. very Cold 5. Oily and Fat 6. Poysonous 7. Coloured 8. Ebullient 9. Water that converts less hard into harder or after any other mode changing any Bodies cast in or stained with them 10. Salt-waters And in the 11th place we may add those which are endowed with any other wonderful property Unto these Classes those that are studious in these things may reduce all Waters which are found described in Authors We shall only in brief shew their generation and differences and alledge some Examples Proposition VI. To explain the cause or generation difference or kinds of Acid or Sowr Waters Of Sowr Waters Great is the celebrity of Acid waters or Springs they
commonly call them Spaws 1. They arise from the admixture of a Spirit of Vitriol Salt and Alom which Minerals being partly simple and partly more or less admixed with other Minerals are found in the cavities of the Earth especially in Iron We prove this to be the true cause of Acidula's and Spaws 1. By reason that almost every where where such Acid waters break out Mines of Vitriol Salt and Alom are found 2. Because the Spirits of Vitriol and Salt are Acid as also some Spirits of Sulphur as is evident from Chymistry 3. Because that from these kind of Acid waters no Acid body but Spirits is separated which are altogether like unto the Spirits of Vitriol and Salt 2. Great is the quantity of Acid waters or Spaws in divers Regions where Mines especially abound The cause is because that an Acid Sowr Spirit is almost in all Bodies by reason that we have shewed that it is Elementary in the Seventh Chapter and first Proposition it is found in all herbs and fruits The difference of Spaws 3. The difference of Spaws is found to be notable Some are found to be so sharp or sowr that men make use of them instead of Vinegar Such a Spring is found in Nicana a Province of Sicilia In Germany the Fountain at Elleboga is of a wonderful Acidity Other Acid Springs are termed Winy because that by their sharpness they come near the grateful tast of Wine amongst which that is famous which is in the Earldom of Catzenellebocen in Germany at the Town Schwalbach In the Province of Lyons in France at the Town of St. Baldomare is a Fountain termed Fontaine forte that is the strong Fountain it supplieth the want of Wine and if that one fourth part of it be mixed with Wine it will want nothing of the tast of Wine if it is poured on Flour it will presently ferment They can boil no Meat in it for by reason of its subtilty it flieth away It is very wholsom so that the Inhabitants seldom use a Physician In Aquitaine not far from the City Bessa is the like Winy sharp Spring unto the waters of which if that you only admix the sixth part of Wine you will imagine that you drink pure Wine without any admixture of water Nigh to Rome is an Alomy sharp Fountain which being mixed with Wine maketh a very grateful Drink Great is the number of Acid Springs in the Vpper Germany whereof some flow into the Danube and others into the Rhine Very many are in the forementioned Earldom of Catzenelleboch in the Province of Triers in Tirolis Rhaetia Vindelicia a noted ane is near Anderna called Heilbrun In the Province of Toledo in Spain near the Village Valentiola are Springs which at the bottom are found Acid and of a Winy tast and in the upper part sweet which Baccius thinketh to happen because that the Nitrous and Acid parts do subside and sink to the bottom But I suppose if that the Relation be true that it proceedeth from the subtilty of the Spirit which being brought to the superficies presently do expire Other Acid Fountains are astringent and contracting the palate which is a token of Iron particles or of the admixture of Vitriol as also of Alom The Water of Acid Fountains in Rainy and Cloudy weather is found less Acid which is a sign of an admixture of condensated Air. Also if that the water be exposed to heat or if it stand in an open Vessel for some hours or if it be carried a long Voyage not well covered in cold Vessels it presently loseth its Acidity which is a sign that the Acidity of them dependeth on a subtile Spirit Yet they also have Atoms and the very Vitriol Alom Iron Salt Gravel and the like This is proved from the matter that is discovered to adhere to the Conduit-pipes The Studious may collect Examples by reading of Authors At least two hundred Acid Springs or Riverets run into the Rhine but by reason of the subtilty of the Spirits nothing of acidity is discovered in the Rhine Do you demand why there are no Acid Fountains in the Northern places I suppose that cause to be the defect of Subterraneous heat and an over great condensation of the Earth as also for that cause it cometh to pass that little or no Gold is found in those Regions Proposition VIII To explain the generation of hot Springs termed Baths and the places of the more famous of them Of the generation of hot Springs or Baths A Spring in Izland is judged the most fervid of them all whose water little differeth from that which hath arrived to the highest degree of heat and boyling on the fire But Caronius writeth that in Japan there is a Spring so hot that no water can be brought to that degree of heat by the most vehement fire It floweth not continually but twice in a day for one hour with a great force of spirits and maketh a great Pool which another hath informed me to be called by the Natives Singacko that is Hell After those the hot Fountains or Baths of Baden in Helvetia are famous Then the Baths of Appona in Italy Of Vulgar Baths there is a great number in the Vpper Germany as also in other places In Scotland is the Lake and River Nessa which is not hot yet it is never congealed with Cold. The cause and generation of Baths is first the admixture of Sulphureous particles whilst the water is carried through Subterraneous passages or rather whilst that it glideth through the Sulphureous Mines to a collection about the Springs 2. The vapours of Smoak and exhalations within the Earth where Sulphur is pure or impure as Peat Coal Amber and the like for these materials continually send forth a calid or warm fume which heat the waters carried thither or gliding through those places Yet particles of Alom are admixed to many nay the most Baths as also of Iron and Niter whence they have somewhat a sharp and astringent tast or sapor Almost all the Baths which we know flow without ceasing except the Pepper-Baths of Germany which are famous in Rhetia not far from Curia And besides Sulphur they contain something of Gold and not a little Niter The water of these Baths breaketh out every year about the third of May and it ceaseth to flow about the fourteenth of September The famous Baths in Germany are the Plumbariae in Lorrain Emsebadae above Constantina in Alsatia near Gebersweil in the Marquisate of Bada Wildbad in the Dukedom of Wertebergh The Blasianae near Tubin There are many also in Japan and the Indian Isles There are such hot ones in the Islands of the Azores that an Egg may be boyled in them Proposition IX To explain the generation of oyly and fat liquors flowing from the earth and to enumerate the places of the earth in which they are found Of oyly liquors Some Fountains send forth a bituminous liquor some a fat water or
water on which drops of oyl do flow In Scotland two miles from Edenborough a Fountain floweth on the whole Superficies of which drops of black oyl do swim the Inhabitants use it to mollifie the skin and to take away scabs So the River Cilicia tearmed Liparis was famous amongst the Ancients in which those that washed themselves were anoynted by the water whether it be so at this day I much doubt So likewise there was a Lake in Aethiopia which anointed those that swam it Also there was a Fountain in India which on a clear day sent forth a great quantity of oyl In Zant and about Dyrrachium and Appallonia as Vitruvius writeth there were Fountains which vomited out abundance of pitch with water There was a Lake in Babylon of great magnitude called Limme Asphaltis it had liquid Bitumen swiming upon it with which the black Semiramis encompassed Babylon with a Wall At this day also at Monasterium in Bavaria is the Fountain Degemsce on the top of which oyl swimmeth and is daily taken off The Acid waters of Schwalback if they be taken in a Vessel and have been settled for some days small drops of oyl swim on the top of them There is a greater quantity in the Fountain tearmed Oelbrum not far from Hagenaw at the Village Lamperscholch Also in the many Bathes are found bituminous particles if so be that they stood quiet for some days as in the Baths of the Kingdom of Naples tearmed the Bath of Petrolei Now the Fountains that send out not an oyl swimming on the water but a meer fat or bituminous liquor are also many Near Gersbachium in the Valley called Lebersthal from an antiquated and exhausted Mine oyl or bitumen floweth with which the Country Swains besmear their Cart-wheels Neither do the Inhabitants know its excellency In the Isle of Sumatra is a Spring from which Naptha like unto oyl floweth others say that it is a kind of Balsom they report Fountains of Amber to be there likewise In Peru near the sea is a bituminous Fountain sending forth a Branch or Riveret into the Sea The Natives use it instead of pitch neither do they use any other matter In Persia not far from Schimachia at or near the high Mountain Barmach in a Valley are about thirty Fountains of Bitumen or Naptha but runing in deep Wells with a great force the Depth is about two Ells wooden steps being made for the conveniency of descent it sendeth forth a Sulphureous and strong Spirit it is of a twofold colour in some red in others white The cause of these bituminous Fountains is a sulphureous and bituminous matter in the bowels of the earth thrust forth by a heat and spirit The cause of the differences is to be sought from the differences of the fat matters themselves as Succinum Amber Oyl of Petrolei Pitch Naptha and the like Proposition X. To explain the generation of bitter water and to reckon up the places of the earth in which they are found Of the generation of bitter waters and the places where they are found Many Fountains and Wells in the Regions of India on the Choromandel have bitter water although that they ebulliate in and flow from Rocks In Pontus a Region of Asia minor a little River tearmed Exampeus at the Town Callipadus is very bitter it rendereth the River Hypanis into which it floweth also very bitter They arise from impure Sulphur Bitumen Nitre Ink Copper as water left a long time in a Copper vessel acquireth a bitter taste The Lake Asphaltites in Palestine which is called Mare Mortuum or the Dead Sea hath a bitter water by reason of the impure Bitumen whence it ought to be referred to the fat waters of the former Proposition It sendeth forth a stinking scent and vapour all things without life sink to the bottom but it suffereth not any Animal to sink neither doth it grow sweet although that it continually swalloweth up the River Jordan It is venomous by reason that it containeth Arsnick Proposition XI Yo explain the cause of very cold Springs and to enumerate the places of the Earth where they are found The cause of cold Springs In the Province of Dauphin in France not far from Vienna is a Fountain of so great cold that the mouths of those that drink it are swelled with it neither can they endure their hands in it it is not diminished for the water that is drawn out of it nor augmented by the water poured into it In Arabia or Aethiopia are most cold Springs although that the heat of the Sun be most excessive there In Stiria not far from Gretz are Fountains so cold at the bottom that none can drink any water runing or drawn from thence In a mile from Calma a Spring sendeth forth water as it were boyling with a great wind when yet it is very cold hence they call it The mad water The cause of the coldness of these Fountains are 1. The admixture of Nitre and Alom also of Mercury Iron and the like 2. The depth of the Spring by reason of the defect of the Solary Beams and of the sulphureous subterraneous heat There are also some Springs which are sometimes cold and sometimes hot In Gatalonia the Lake and Fountain Salsula in the Winter is hot and in the Summer very cold This is common to it with many others I think the cause to be that in the Summer the pores of the Earth are open through which the hot Spirits break forth in the Winter they are closed whence within there are hot Furnaces that heat the waters So some Fountains are more hot in the night than in the day Proposition XII To explain the generation of those waters which seem to change bodies into another kind and to reckon up the places of the Earth where they are found There are some waters which change wood into the hardest stone In Ireland Of the generation of waters which change bodies into another kind c. above the City Armagh in a Pool not very large a stake of wood if it be fixed for some months the part that sticketh in the Mud will be iron the part which is touched with the water is turned into stone and the rest remaineth wood so Giraldus and Maginus relate but Brietius sayeth I know not by what authority that it is a meer fable The waters of Loches in Blois a Province in France turn all things put into it into stone At the City Senon in Burgundia near a Lake a Spring floweth which hardneth into stone Vitruvius saith that in Cappadocia between Mazaca and Tuana is a large Lake which changeth a reed or wood put into it in one day into stone In Bohemia near the Baths of Charles is a Fountain in which wood lying long is changed into stone Other waters are thought to change Iron into Copper which yet really they do not but by reason that waters themselves carry particles and spirit of Copper
and Vitriol therefore they dissolve the particles of Iron and by degrees take away from it which whilst that they do the Copper particles of the water are reposed in the place of the Iron ones taken away or there adhere whilst that they glide with the runing water The reason of those that change wood into stone are these 1. Some do not change the wood it self into stone but earthy stony and saline particles contained in the water do apply themselves to the wood and so as it were cover the wood with a stony crust and do not really change it 2. Some do not change the wood into stone but cause a stony hardness to the wood which some mineral waters may possibly do 3. If that some waters have truly changed wood into stone I conceive it to be done after this manner that chief difference is found by sight between the wood and the stone that in the wood there are certain long Fibres or Veins unto which the particles do cohere and those are less thick but in stone the particles are like unto Atoms without any certain extension into long Fibres If that therefore any water dissolve and as it were grind the particles cohering in the wood according to a long line so that now they do no more cohere after this mode but yet are more condensed there will be no more any great difference between the wood and stone as may be observed by our Eyes yet it is probable that these mineral waters communicate some substance to the wood it self There are other waters whose faculty is reported to be able to change the colours in the hair of man or beast Proposition XIII To explain the cause of poisonous and death-causing waters and to reckon up the places where they are Of poisonous waters Such is the Lake Asphaltites by reason of its Arsenical Bitumen In times past famous was the Fountain of Terracina which was called Neptunicus in the Region of the Volsci of which those that drank were deprived of their lives therefore it was filled up with stones by the Inhabitants In Thessalia a Fountain springeth of which no Cattle drink nor no kind of Beast approacheth Famous or rather infamous is the water which in the Region of Arcadia called Nonacris the Ancients write to drop exceeding cold from stony Rocks therefore called the Infernal and Stygian water which no vessel either of silver brass or iron could be preserved in without breaking And by this water Historians report that Alexander the Great was killed by Jolla Son of Antipater and that not without the infamy of Aristotle At this day many mortiferous waters are found in the Places or Regions called the Alpes but most of them are stopped with stones which is the reason that so few death-causing Fountains are known Now the generation of such water is if the water glide or flow through Arsenical Mercurial or Antimonial Earths and are impregnated with their fumes For as the smoak or fume of Arsnick killeth living creatures so waters impregnated with such a fume do the same Proposition XIV To explain the generation of coloured waters and their differences and to enumerate the places of the Earth in which they are found At Chinen in France water floweth from a Cave of somewhat a yellowish colour Of coloured waters In the Kingdom of Congo a Riveret floweth of a red colour into the Sea In some places waters flow of a black of a green and such like colours but they are but few The cause of the colour of these waters is that they glide or run from lands before they come to the Fountain Proposition XV. To explain the generation of Salt-waters and to reckon up the places of the Earth in which they are found Of the generation of Salt-waters The generation is twofold 1. From the Ocean they come through Subterraneous passages and flow to the Superficies of the Earth 2. They are generated of a Salt contained in the Earth such as is found in many places through which whilst the water glideth it conceiveth Saline particles and spirits before that it arrive at the Spring Great is the plenty and that known to every one of Salt Fountains We have spoken in the preceding Chapter and this matter is easily known by reason of the abundance of Salt almost every where lying hidden in the Earth seeing that Salt it self is an Element Proposition XVI To explain the cause of Ebullient Fountains and those that break out with a great spirit and wind and to enumerate the places of the Earth wherein they are found The cause is partly a Sulphureous spirit and partly a Nitrous spirit commixed with water in the Earth Of ebullient Fountains if that it be a Sulphureous spirit the waters are hot if Nitrous cold For neither are all the waters which ebulliate like to those that are hot hot but many of them are cold as is evident from that near to Culma called a mad water of which we have spoken in the Twelfth Proposition The River Tamayus in Galaecia ariseth from a Lake in its rising for some months of the year it sendeth forth a mighty noise In Japan that wonderful hot Fountain of which we have spoken in the Eighth Proposition not above twice every day breaketh forth for the most part for one hour now when that the water beginneth to flow it is carried with so great a force and vehemency of wind that it moveth the vast stones incumbent on the Well and leapeth to the height of three or four Ells with so great a noise like unto the discharge of Cannon In Westphalia a Fountain breaketh forth tearmed Bolderborn from its noise Most of the Spaws and Baths break forth with an abundance of wind and ebulliate as if they boyled a Sulphureous spirit causeth this in the Baths and in the Spaws the Spirits of Vitriol Nitre and the like Proposition XVII To enumerate the kinds of waters which have other certain wonderful properties and to explain the causes of them Unto this Classis all others ought to be reduced which cannot conveniently be referred unto the former sorts Other kinds of waters of wonderful properties So there is a Fountain in Portugal tearmed Cadina devouring all that is cast into it Also in times past there was another near to it rejecting all things cast into it but this latter is obstructed In Andalusia not far from the City Guadiana Eusebius Nierenburgius relateth that there is a Lake which sheweth the Seasons or Tempest for when that this is approaching it maketh an horrible noise which is oftentimes heard for the space of 18 or 20 miles In Calice in France is a Well into which if that a stone is cast in a noise will be heard like Thunder in the cavities of the Well In the Alpes are Wells whose water being drank off contracteth swellings of a great bigness hanging from their necks In the Kingdom of Granada at the Town Antiquarius is
Streights 4. Rivers 5. Lakes 6. Pools and 7. Marishes 1. Marishes may be exsiccated or drained either by subduction of the water or by exsiccation of the earth as none can doubt for in many Regions the Soil is fruitful where there were Marishes some years since as in Westphalia Gelderland Brabant Holland Muscovia 2. The same is the account of Pools seeing that they differ not much from Marishes Proposition V. Rivers leave their Channel or Shoar that is part of their Channel and afford new Land Rivers quit their Shoar and afford new Land 1. If that they carry much Terrestrial matter Sand or Gravel with them which sinketh to the bottom in progress of they time so augment the Altitude of the Channel that it is no more depressed than that place from whence the water floweth from the vicine earth but if that that matter sinketh into one place in part of the Channel it will separate one part which then at length will be dried up 2. If that the River take another Channel whether it be done by Art or Nature and a violent cause as by Wind Inundation or the like 3. If the Springs of the Rivers be obstructed or cease to send forth water the earth being fallen in or condensated or a great quantity of Sand being driven by the winds into the Fountains or adjacent places Examples of Rivers whose Channels are exsiccated at this time either in whole or in part are every where obvious in Writers yet not of great Rivers but of small or of the parts of any great Rivers So a Channel of an Arm of the Rhine which flowing by Leyden flowed in times past into the German Ocean now for some Ages deserted by the water at this day is land the Rhine stagnating between Leyden and the Vicus Cattorum The Shoars are uncovered from the waters of Rivers and that some Rivers run in a more narrow Channel than they did formerly is manifest from many examples and from thence that some at this day are not Navigable which formerly were may easily be collected the Altitude of the water being diminished and none at all to be left in their Channel at some time or other as in the River Scaldis Therefore Governours of Commonwealths have a great care that the Mud and Sediments be drawn from out the Channels of Rivers that they may remain navigable as is seen in many places But great Rivers cannot be dried up or changed into land except in many ages because that many lesser Rivers flowing from divers parts make them of which though some may be dried up or change their course yet all do not suffer the same except in a long space of time and the Channel is deeper But one heap or ridge of Sand may cause the River to run through another Channel and the former to be dried up yet it taketh not away the River except the Fountains or Branches of it be obstructed Therefore it is true that neither the Nile Tanais Albis or the Rhine or other Rivers always flowed or shall perpetually flow but that there was earth before and shall be afterwards where they now flow Proposition VI. Lakes are dried up and changed into Land Lakes dried up and changed into Land 1. If that a Lake be constituted from Rivers that flow in that mutation is made by the abduction withdrawing or cessation of the River and also by evaporation 2. If that a Lake receiveth waters by a subterraneous passage from the Ocean or Sea there will be a mutation of that Lake after that those subterraneous passages are obstructed and so Lakes are first changed into standing Pools and Marishes then at length into dry Land It is evident saith Aristotle that because a force of waters hath brought in Mud or something of that sort he speaketh of Lakes made of Rivers therefore standing Pools are made and the earth is dry and that their water being left and standing in succession of time it is exsiccated and altogether vanisheth So the Lands that touch upon the Lake Maeotis by the Soil brought down by the Rivers are increased so much that Ships now far less then those about 60 years since for traffick sake enter into it There are many examples found of small Lakes changed into dry Land especially in Holland Proposition VII Streights are exsiccated and changed into Isthmusses or Continents That happeneth Streights when that by reason of the continual sinking of the Terrestrial matter made in a long time the channel of the Streight is become so high that it denieth a passage to the Sea So it is very probable that the Isthmus between Africa and Asia was a Streight by which the Mediterranean and Red-sea were conjoyned as we shall shew in the following Proposition In many Streights at this day the Altitude of the Sea and the Altitude of the Channel is found lesser than in former time which is a certain token that those Streights shall have no water in them in the time to come and shall be changed into a dry Isthmus So the Streight through which the Atlantick Ocean maketh a Gulph which the Hollanders called Snyder-zee and the Texell at this day receiveth no larger landing Ships and the depth of the Sea is every year found lesser and the Land higher therefore where the water is at the Texell there after some Ages will be dry Land Concerning the Vlier the same in time to come will also happen Proposition VIII The Bays or Gulphs which the Ocean maketh between the Mid-lands in course of time do become dry places Bays or Gulphs in time do become dry Land This is done by a double cause 1. If that the Streight by which the Bay is conjoyned to the Ocean becometh an Isthmus or else be stopped by Sand and Gravel which is done in progress of time as we have said in the preceding Proposition For by this cause the Bay of the Ocean and a part or member of it shall be cut off from the body and shall become a Lake and then a standing Pool and Marish and by exsiccation become earth and no water shall be seen there 2. If that the very Channel of the Bay become higher by reason of the Rivers flowing into it and carrying Sand along with it that it in time cannot receive the Sea so by degrees the Sea will recede from the shoars of that Bay Therefore the Mediterranean the Baltick the Red Persian and other Seas that are Bays of the Ocean will cease in time to be Seas and will be changed into Lands which shall be fully proved in the following Proposition Proposition IX The Ocean for saketh some Shoars or Coasts so that it becometh Land where the Ocean formerly was Where the Ocean formerly was is now Land by its forsaking the shoars That happeneth for these causes 1. If that the force of water be broken at the shoars by Rocks here and there on the Coasts or Clifts in the Sea for that
force being broken the Terrestrial parts of the water subside and sink and augment the Altitude of the banks of Sand whence it cometh to pass that the impetus of the Ocean is more and more broken and therefore more Terrestrial matter subsideth so that the ridges being augmented they exclude the Ocean or make the Channel more shallow 2. It conduceth much to the Augmentation of the shoars if that the shoars be sandy and stony that the Ocean runing by can separate or take away little with it so that when it can take away nothing it always leaveth some particles that in progress of time the shoars become more high and force or stop the Ocean from its accustomed place 3. If that another adjacent shoar hath less solid Earth that is light and full of Caverns for the Ocean carrieth the dissolved and broken parts of Earth to the vicine shoars 4. If that great Rivers discharge themselves by the shoar into that Sea for these Rivers carrying with them much Sand and Mud or Gravel when that they arrive to the mouth and shoar where they endeavour to exonerate themselves into the Sea they leave it partly because the Channel is there more broad and partly because that the Sea resisteth the flux of them and this is chiefly observed in Regions which Rivers overflow every year 5. If that frequent Winds blow from the Sea to the shoar and the shoar be rocky and firm not sandy 6. If that the flux of the Sea be swift and vehement and the reflux slow and gentle for the gentle reflux taketh not away the matter that the swift flux brought but suffereth it to sink If that the shoar descendeth obliquely into the Sea for a long space and bend not down directly and perpendicularly for so the violence of the Sea decreaseth and leaveth the matter behind The Land of Aegypt caused by the Nile There are many places of the Earth which it is evident were formerly taken up by the Ocean Where Aegypt is in time past was the Sea as is proved by the testimony of the Ancients and by Experience at this day For the Nile flowing from the remote Regions of Aethiopia and every year entring the Channel where it swelleth it expandeth it self through all Aegypt where when the force of the River ceaseth the Mud sinketh and also the Terrestrial matter which the swift course of the River brought in and so Aegypt becometh higher And before that so much matter was brought in by the Nile then the Sea covered the Land of Aegypt but now the Sea is not admitted by reason of the height Of this Aristotle and Others are Witnesses his words are these This place and the whole Region of Aegypt which was only made by the River seemeth always to become more dry and because that the Marishes by degrees drying up the adjacent places began to be inhabited the length of time obliterated the beginning of it therefore all the mouths of the Nile except that of Canopus seem to be made by the Industry of Man and not by the River Moreover all Aegypt anciently consisted of a City called Thebes as is very manifest which Homer also declareth who flourished as I have said after this Mutation For he maketh mention of that place as if that Memphis as yet had no Being or at least not so big Seneca here explaineth it more clearly All Aegypt saith he is made up of Mud for if that we may credit Homer Pharos was so far from the Continent as that a Ship with a full spread Sail could harldly measure or encompass it in an whole day but it is now adjoyned to the Continent for the Nile flowing muddy and troubled and drawing much Mud with it and so adding to it the former Lands hath made Aegypt larger by an Annual increase Hence the soil is muddy and fat neither hath it any Intervals in it but hath increased to a solidity The Rivers Ganges and Indus by their Inundations both cause also Land Ganges and Indus in India both famous Rivers have caused the same by their Inundations that the Nile hath also Rio de la Plata in Brazil And it is probable that China was generated or at least augmented after the same mode by reason that a violent River which they call the Yellow River flowing from Tartary into China often overflowing although not in an Anniversary time hath so much Sand and Gravel that it maketh the third part of its water These Examples demonstrate the cause laid down in the fourth place viz. why Rivers should cause the Sea to forsake the Shoar but the Sea it self is also oftentimes the cause of its departure in divers Regions viz. whilst that it carrieth and layeth down the matter by which the Channel and Shoar acquire the greater Altitude and admit not the approach of the Sea so Holland Zeland and Gelderland were made for that the Ocean in time past possessed these Countries is known both from Ancient Histories or Monuments as also from the quality of the Soil it self The shells of Fishes found on the Clifts or higher parts of Gelderland not far from Noviomagus do sufficiently testifie the same as also shrubs and ouzey matter found in the profundity of the soil Add that the Sea is higher than the Land of these Regions and hath overflowed it and would cover it again if that it were not obstructed by banks of Sands and Ramparts Yet there are some that say they suppose that Holland and Zeland were brought from the Rhine and the Mosa which is not improbable Proposition X. To shew the Generation of Sandy-banks in the Sea and elsewhere The generation of Sandy banks We term those banks of Sand that are elevated above the Channel of the River to that height that they hinder the passage of Ships Neither do they differ from Rocks but that their parts do cohere and are condensated but the Sand-banks do not consist of parts very coherent But these words are oftentimes confounded The Sand-banks do either lie in the Channels of Rivers as many are in the Wolga and the Albis or at the mouths of Rivers which is frequent as in the Wolga and the Albis or on the Sea-shoar or amidst Seas The mode of the generation is the same by which we have said in the foregoing Propositions that the Channels of Rivers are dried and the Sea forsaketh the shoar for so oftentimes it cometh to pass that the Ocean before that it leaveth part of the Earth altogether first generateth this ridge of Sand not far from the shoar and so by degrees retreateth back and these banks become parts of the Continent After the same mode it hapneth in the Channels of Rivers before that they are wholly dried and forsaken by the water The most frequent cause is when Rivers are augmented by rain or dissolved snow and so run violently for then where their motion is more vehement and Channel more narrow they eat off the mud
many Examples of the Inundations of the Ocean as formerly in Thessaly and not long since in Friezland and Holsatia 3. When by reason of the same causes it penetrateth the firm Land and maketh Islands By this Mode we have said in the former Propositions that it is likely that that Sea had its original which interfloweth between those innumerable Oriental Isles and that which floweth between the Maldivian Isles and India and also between the Gulph of Bengala and Camboja 4. When it by degrees eateth and consumeth the Coasts or Shoars and so in progress of time covereth some parts of the shoar and of the adiacent land So the Baltick Sea invaded the Coasts of Pomerania and destroyed the famous Town or Empory of Vinetam so taking away the Islands from the Coast of Norway it let in it self between these Isles and the Continent So the German Ocean hath possessed the shoar of Holland near the Village of the Catti in a great space of Land so that the Ruins of the Brittish Tower formerly a Fortress or Castle of the Romans now lieth inconspicuous being covered with water far from the shoar in the Sea The Ocean hath taken from the North part of the Island of Ceilan the space of 20 miles so that at this day it is far lesser than it was And there are many more Examples of the like kind Corollary From hence we may collect that those places of the Earth where now the Ocean is in times past were Land and again shall be land to wit if that we do suppose that the earth hath continued so many thousand years and shall yet continue Concerning this Argument you may consult Aristotle in the first Book of his Meteors and the twelfth Chapter and Stevinus in his Geography If that you demand how the Ocean shall occupy the place of Mountains that then the Mountains shall not be covered by the Sea but shall then become either Rocks or Islands other earth being forced unto them that is confirmed by the example of many Islands yea almost of all because that Experience testifieth that almost all Isles have Mountains in the midst as Ceilan Sumatra Java furthermore some are nothing else but Mountains as St. Helena Ascension the Hesperides and the like Seeing therefore that those places of the Ocean in which those Isles lye in Ages to come shall be or already have been land then indeed the Mountains of these Isles shall be Mountains of the Continent Proposition XVIII Whether it is possible that the whole superficies of the Earth should become dry or Land Or that it should be all liquid or covered with water That the most parts should be of an Earthy superficies at one time more than at another or that more should be covered with water Of the whole Superficies of the Earth whether it may become all Land or all Water 1. That sometimes the land should possess a greater part of the superficies of the Earth than at another Also that which is a consequence to the former that water at one time should possess the greater part of the superficies of the Earth more than at another hath been sufficiently shewed in the second Proposition of this Chapter 2. Whether the Water or Ocean can cover the whole Earth so that there shall be no Earth or Island above it and so cause a Universal stood Unto this I answer That a mode may be conceived and explained by which it may naturally be done but yet by reason of the compaction of the Lands and Altitude of the Mountains it is scarcely probable that any such thing will be The mode by which it may be done is the same with that explained in the second Proposition For if that the Ocean continually eateth the land from the shoar and layeth it down in the profoundest parts of its Channel and do this in a perpetual course of time then it shall take away all the Lands of the superficies or extant parts and it self shall cover all the Earth And the Mountains shall either be made Rocks or shall by degrees sink and fall their Foundations being consumed by the vehement force of the water But this may be done more easily if that we will follow their opinion who attribute a greater height to the Ocean than to the Land But we have in the precedent discourse sufficiently confuted that opinion 3. Whether that the Land can so occupy the whole superficies of the Earth so that all the water and the whole Ocean may be contained in the Caverns of the Earth or in the subterraneous passage and covered by the Earth Unto this I answer after the same manner that it is not impossible and that a Mode may be conceived by which it may be done but yet scarcely ever shall be Now there is only one Mode to be conceived viz. that if now there are or may be so many cavities within the depth of the earth within the which the Ocean may be contained for neither hath it been demonstrated by any as hitherto that such cavities are not in the depth of the earth and if they be not but that they may be done 1. by the violence of the earth and 2. by subterraneous winds Proposition XIX Why in the middle of the Ocean no Islands are found and no abundancy of Isles but most at great Continents or great Islands No Isles found in the middle of the Ocean Of the truth of this Proposition we ought not to doubt for experience manifestly proveth it In the midst of the vast Pacifick Ocean between Africa and Brasilia besides the Isle of Sancta Helena and that of the Ascension few are found but about the shoars of the Continent or in the Ocean not far from the Coasts of the greatest Continents all Islands are those few only excepted which I have spoken of this may especially be taken notice of in those numerous ones that we tearm troops of Isles which are all near the Continent The troop of the Isles of the Aegean Sea adjoyneth to Europe and Asia the Hesperides to Africa the Maldivian Isles to India as also all the Indian Isles between Asia and the South Continent only the Flandrian Isles or Azores seem to be situated in the midst of the Ocean between the old World and America although that they are more near to that than to this The cause of this Phenomenon or situation of the Islands without doubt is that they had a Being from the irruption of the Ocean into the Continents by which violence the Lands of the Continents were separated but because the Altitude of the Ocean was not so great that it could cover all the Lands intercepted thence here and there between the Continents and at the Continents troops of Islands did arise also it is likely that some of them were generated by another mode viz. because the Ocean cannot carry the Lands separated and cut off any long space with it but suffereth them by degrees to subside
not a long distance from the shoars which subsidency or sinking continued for many Ages at length caused Isles therefore in the middle of the Ocean are few Islands 1. Because that place is more remote from the shoar than that any of the eaten off parts should be carried thither 2. Because that the commotion and force of the water is greater there which moveth the earth of the Channel or rather promoteth the depth than suffereth Islands to be generated there 3. Because there are no Continents there therefore neither can troops or heaps of Islands be according to the first mode by which we have shewed such heaps of Isles to be produced yet in times past when that the middle of the Ocean was not where 't is now it is not unlikely that such Isles were here and by degrees were swallowed by the Ocean OF Absolute Geography SECT V. Containing an explication of the Atmosphere and the Winds In three Chapters CHAP. XIX Of the Atmosphere and Air. Proposition I. From the parts of the Earth as well dry as moist or from the Earth and Water vapours and fumes do continually exhale into that space which is about the Earth THE Cause is twofold first the Celestial heat of the Stars especially the Sun and Moon Of vapours and fumes The other is a Terrestrial heat or subterranean or rather terrestrial fire or which is admixed with the parts of the earth For we see that almost all bodies the least fire being moved towards them send forth a fume Seeing therefore that both the Celestial and Terrestrial heat is naught else but a certain fire therefore it is also necessary that vapours and fumes should be advanced by it from the parts of the earth So the truth of the Proposition is evidenced à priori Experience also confirmeth the same For those that travel in the night time especially when the Moon shineth and that towards the water discover many vapours to wander and be advanced about the Superficies of the earth Also it is vulgarly known that in the day the Sun doth raise many vapours also when that a mist ariseth upwards which is a certain token of rain to follow Proposition II. The Atmosphere is a space about the whole earth in which the exhalations raised from the earth are always present And it is uncertain whether that anything or body else be contained in it besides these exhalations It is also taken for the exhalations themselves about the whole earth There is no small controversie amongst modern Philosophers Of the Atmosphere concerning the body which consisteth about the earth For many Mathematicians of sound knowledge determine that there is nothing besides exhalations elevated from the earth and therefore they take the Atmosphere and Air for one and the same and immediately after the Atmosphere place the Aetherial substance But other Philosophers suppose that besides these exhalations in the space about the earth that there is a certain peculiar and simple body which they call Air although that they freely grant that exhalations may be changed into Air and contrariwise into clouds and thick vapours The same Persons after this Air even to the Lunary Orb place another subtile thin body different from the Aether which indeed they tearm Fire but they confess that it is less properly done and that it doth not agree with our fire for it is a calid substance not burning dry and very subtile not to cause the refractions of the rayes of the Sun and Stars which yet they will have to be done in this Air. Those being well considered these two opinions of the Philosophers seem rather to differ in words than in matter it self For as for the Air because that they grant it so gross that a refraction of rayes may be made in it and that it may be generated from exhalations by a light mutation the Air seemeth nothing else but a subtile exhalation although it was not exhaled from the earth As for the Sublunary Fire when that they confess that it is so improperly tearmed but they affirm that it is so tenuous that it causeth no refraction of rayes this seemeth little to differ from the Aether We affirm therefore that the Atmostphere and Air are a body about the earth on which the rayes falling are refracted laying aside the controversie whence this body hath its original which definition agreeth with the former For neither is it likely that any exhalations can be elevated from the earth so subtile that they should cause no refraction or impediment to the luminous rayes proceeding from the Aether yet if that such be granted we cannot know their Altitude and whether that they be excluded from the Atmosphere which yet if that any one will sharply urge supposing that the little fires or rayes cast from the Sun on the earth again recoil to the Sun he will not deny but that the latter definition is commodious Therefore the Atmosphere and Air are naught else but a contexture of many small bodies which adhere to the earth as a down or wool circumvesteth a Peach Proposition III. Sometimes more sometimes lesser exhalations are drawn from the earth especially in divers places Of exhalations The cause is 1. The various elevation of the Sun above the Horizon or depression beneath it 2. The diversity of the age of the Moon and its elevation above the Horizon 3. The rising and setting of the other Stars and their constitution above the Horizon 4. The diversity in the parts of the earth them selves for watery and humid places do more easily send forth vapours than earthy and dry Proposition IV. The exhalations which constitute the Atmosphere are of a divers kind especially in sundry Regions viz. watery saltish earthy sulphureous spirituous The sensible compounded exhalations or parts of the Atmosphere are divers viz. mixed of simple particles Of the exhalations which constitute the Atmosphere The cause is because that in the parts of the earth such bodies are of a divers sort and are advanced by heat some more easily and other some with greater difficulty Concerning the earthy particles some one may doubt because that those are scarcely apt to be elevated 1. By reason of the smalness of their dusts which are light seeing that gravity is an affection of compacted bodies 2. By admixture of sulphureous particles which violently carry those earthy ones with them Moreover that there are sulphureous particles in the Air is proved from the fiery Meteors Lightnings Thunder and the like yea a sulphureous odor or scent after Thunder and Lightning manifestly asserteth the same As for the watery parts we ought not to question for saline and spirituous exhalations by reason of their tenuousness are easily exhaled from the earth Little Animals generated in great number and abundance in the Air confirm the same The Aristotelians divide exhalations into two kinds to wit vapours and fumes Vapours are generated of water and easily return into the same again Fumes
calculation and make a trial of the matter whether that the Altitude be the same every where and at every time I will give them here Examples from the Observations of Tycho who hath observed the refractions of the Sun and Moon at every degree of their Altitude And because that the Observations of Lansbergius because that he observed them in a different Air if that he observed them at all differ from those of Tycho's I will also add them The TABLE of Refractions The degrees of Altitude The Refraction of the Sun according to Tycho The Refraction of the Moon according to Tycho The Refraction of the Sun and Moon according to Lansbergius Degrees Minute 1. Minute 1. Minute 1. 1. 0 34 33 34  1 26 25 26  2 20 20 21  3 17 17 18  4 15 15 15 45 5 14 14 14 0 6 13 14 12 30 7 12 13 11 15 8 11 12 10 5 9 10 11 9 5 10 10 11 8 15 11 9 10 7 35 12 9 10 7 5 13 8 9 6 40 14 8 8 6 19 15 7 8 6 0 16 7 7 5 42 17 6 7 5 24 18 6 6 5 7 19 5 6 4 50 20 4 5 4 33 21 4 4 4 16 22 3 3 4 0 23 3 3 3 44 24 3 3 3 28 25 2 2 3 12 26 2 2 2 56 27 2 2 2 40 28 2 2 2 24 29 2 2 2 9 30 1 1 1 54 31 1 1 1 39 32 1 1 1 24 33 1 1 1 9 34 1 1 0 55 35 1 1 0 41 36 1 1 0 27 37 0 1 0 13 38 0 1 0 0 The refractions of the Sun and Moon according to Lansbergius and Tycho Lansbergius placeth both the same refractions of the Sun and Moon but Tycho maketh them somewhat divers viz. about the Horizon he maketh the refractions of the Sun greater than those of the Moon then the fifth degree of Altitude he maketh them equal from this then at length he maketh the refractions of the Moon a little bigger than those of the Sun Indeed I confess my self ignorant of the cause of this except it be to be ascribed to the weakness of the light of the Moon Moreover Tycho omitted the second Minutes which yet should not be omitted if that they come near to 60 because that there is use of them in the calculation of the altitude of the Air. Now you must know that the refractions of all the Stars are the same or else that the difference is insensible viz. in one Air But if that the Air be thick the refractions will be greater An Example of it is this whereof a cause hath not yet been rendred sufficiently hitherto by any The Dutch Wintering in Nova Zembla beheld the Sun after the night of some Months when that as yet the Limbus or edge of the Sun was yet beneath the Horizon four degrees at least therefore the refraction n f L is 4 deg 30 min. Then at length when that it was depressed beneath the Horizon 3 degrees 40 minutes they saw him elevated above the Horizon 30 degrees viz. his upper Limbus therefore the refraction m r L we conceive m r S to fall beneath the Horizon and r L g to be 30 min. shall be 4 deg 11 min. and L L T 90 deg 30 min. From hence shall be found the altitude of the Air L f and the reason of the density of that Air at Nova Zembla which yet was serene at the time of the Observation Now the Altitude is found much greater than the other refractions admit of viz. of almost two miles neither is it corrected by the position of a greater thickness of Air as shall be shewed in the following Proposition by reason that the Angle T f L cannot be greater than 85 deg 30 min. if that n f L is 4 deg 30 min. it becometh greater if that d f be placed less than 2 miles Therefore we do not undeservedly doubt of the truth of the observation of the Mariners seeing that no like Example hath been observed yea the contrary hath been observed in the same place See Chap. 26. Proposit uit Moreover no reason can be rendred that in those places after so long an absence of the Sun the Air should be higher than at the time wherein after so long a stay the Sun departed seeing that rather the contrary doth follow viz. the Air becoming more thick and lower by reason of contraction if that any one will urge the altitude of the Air to be inconstant Yet when I more accurately weigh all the matters three things fall in with me by which that apparancy and great refraction may be salved for seeing that the Master or Pilot was skilful in Astronomy and also that they saw the Sun elevated above the Horizon in which he was yet depressed therefore we ought not to deny the Observation neither ought we to be suspicious concerning an Errour in the numeration of the days by reason of that long night for when that they returned to their own Countrey they reckoned the same day of the year that their Country-men reckoned which they could not have done if that before they had made a false reckoning of the days For if that we will admit so great an altitude of the Air such as the refractions of the temperate and torrid Zones do not admit of we must say that the Air is every where the same both in the torrid and temperate Zone as it is in the frigid but the supream Region of the Air both in the torrid and temperate Zone is so subtile that it maketh no refraction but only the middle Region Whence it is no wonder if that the refractions in the torrid and temperate Zone be lesser for although the Air be lower that causeth them for which cause the refraction ought to be greater yet it s far more rare than the other Air. But yet an Objection may be made against this viz. that the observation of the Mariners was made in a serene Air as they themselves testifie Unto this I answer That yet it seemeth not so probable that the Air should be so subtile as in the torrid and temperate Zone when that the Sky is most serene Secondly it may be said That that Air of the frigid Zone when that the Sun after a long absence returneth unto it is first attenuated in the superior Region and the middle is yet somewhat more thick and therefore the Sun was seen through two refractions as the Stars through the Air and a Glass Now a double refraction doth far more depress the Star beneath the Horizon than a simple and so the altitude of the Air the space of one mile or ¾ Neither may you here object why the same doth not happen at that time when that the Sun departeth from the Air and maketh the beginning of the âong Night For then it is probable that there is less difference in the thickness of the Air by reason of the long
intermedial Winds so that there were 12 winds every one of which they designed by their proper terms although that some others reckon otherwise The Latins besides these twelve added the names of twelve more which blow between two of the former twelve the following Diagram sheweth their appellations and order in which the Greek winds are noted by Greater letters and those which the Romans have interposed between every two are noted by Lesser letters yet Seneca noteth that this inconveniency was long since observed by Varro and that therefore he ordered these twelve VVinds thus that every two should be distant by equal distances not having any regard of the rising of the Solary quarter but in that Seneca affirmeth that there are no more VVinds than twelve is false and ridiculous for they are infinite Proposition IX Hitherto we have explained the distribution of the Winds taken from the quarters and have also shewed that both the divisions of the Ancient Grecians and Romans is less adapted to the use of Navigation and Geography Therefore we deservedly retain the more recent distributions which constitute 32 Winds blowing from quarters equally distant Now those are called Opposite Winds or contrary which blow from quarters diametrically opposite For we conceive the Winds as coming from another place to our place but we suppose a quarter to be extended from our place to another place Proposition X. The Causes of the Winds are various for seeing that the Wind is nothing else but a continued protraction of the Air all those things which are able to effect such a protrusion will be the causes of Winds Now they are these The Causes of the Winds are various 1. The chief and general cause is the Sun it self which attenuateth and rarefieth the Air by his fiery beams especially that on which he sendeth forth his perpendicular rays or over which he standeth for the Air being rarefied requireth far more space Thence it cometh to pass that the Air being forced by the Sun doth protrude the vicine Air with a great force and when that the Sun is moved round from the East into the West the chief force of the Air caused by him is towards the West And a sign of it may be that in many places of the torrid Zone and every where in the Sea a continual Easterly wind doth blow viz. the Sun thrusteth forwards the Air from the East towards the West and exceedeth not the torrid Zone Indeed the rarefied Air is thrust forwards circularly towards all the quarters North East South West but yet it is not admitted in all quarters But the more vehement protrusion is towards the West because that the Sun moveth towards that quarter therefore the wind is almost continually more sensible in the torrid Zone towards this quarter But in our Zone for many days in the Morning before the rising of the Sun and after that where for the most part other Winds do cease Of other quarters some are sometimes more disposed than others to receive this force therefore where the protrusion becometh greater towards the North the South Wind is said to blow when that it is thrust towards the East then the West Wind bloweth when towards the South the North and so for other quarters And it is to be noted that when this protrusion is made to any quarter lying without those four Cardinal Quarters then in divers Regions a diverse Wind shall be seen For although that that quarter be one in respect of the place unto which the Sun is vertical yet in respect of other places it is diverse and so the same cause maketh the same Wind to be termed by divers names in several Regions Now this cause is either assisted or hindred by other causes if that it be assisted it maketh the Wind vehement if it he hindred it maketh it less vehement from that quarter and oftentimes another Wind then bloweth which is rather assisted by that general cause 2. I make the second cause of the Winds and that more frequently Exhalations elevated copiously and with a violence from the Sea and Land but they scarce cause any Winds except that when they begin to be rarefied 3. The attenuation and rarefaction of the Clouds and Mists whether that it be caused by the Sun or from other Stars or whether from included or adjoyned fires or sulphureous particles 4. The dissolving of Snow and Ice especially of that which lieth on Mountainous places and are not wholly dissolved into water 5. The various scituation and rising of the Moon and the other Stars 6. The condensation and rarefaction of the Air and Vapours by any heat or cold 7. The descent of the Clouds by which the subjected Air is pressed The consideration of the Aeolopila conduceth much to the more easie understanding of these causes into which the water included fire being put to it by an arrow orifice sendeth forth the winds with a great force until that all the water be exhaled Now these retain the place of a narrow orifice in the Air 1. The more dense circumstantial Air. 2. If that the same vicine Air be forced by or prohibited to give place by other Vapours or Mists 3. If that the Air be more condensed towards one quarter and so layeth open a way to Blasts Proposition XI Why the Winds blow so that they make a perpendicular line over the Horizon or why the going forth of the Winds is perpendicular to the Horizon The Winds so blow that they make a perpendicular âine over the Horizon The cause is by reason that the Air in a Spherical figure doth encompass the Earth and the protrusion of the Air is made for the most part through the greatest circle of the Sphere which passeth through the Center of the Earth for although we may suppose the Air to be forced according to a transverse line yet because that there is a lesser force from the sides and greater resistance thence it cometh to pass that the winds incumb into the midst of the passage But we shall more commodiously conceive this mode if that we do but consider the first cause of the winds for the Sun thrusts forwards the Air towards all the quarters of that place unto which it is vertical but that force is not received in all as I have said If that now we consider the great Circles drawn from that place and amongst these those in which the Air is thrust forwards all those places of the Earth seated in this circle or semicircle shall find the wind falling down perpendicularly by reason that every great Circle of the Earth passing through any place of it is perpendicular to the Horizon of that place The same is the reason if that at any time the wind breaketh forth from a thick Fog or dissolved Clouds but those places that are scituated without these Circles feel not the wind although that the Air be moved above their Horizon because that it is not perpendicular to that
Horizon but oblique Yet it is not general that the wind proceedeth in a perpendicular way to the Horizon because that oftentimes in the Air transverse Blasts are found So we see that Smoak coming forth of a Chimney is not carried by the wind towards one quarter but part of it is carried unto other quarters Proposition XII Why the Winds blow by an interrupted force so that sometimes they cease and other some as it were with redoubled strength they return with the greater importunity And why that they seem more continually to blow on the Sea so that it is discovered less calm The Winds ãâã blow by an interrupted force I suppose the reason to be that the cause that moveth or stirreth up the Winds continueth not always but that some space is required unto the collection of such a quantity which by such a vehemency may break through the Air and therefore because that Exhalations are more continual in the Air and the motion is less impeded there the calm in the Ocean is less discovered although that it be not wholly removed Proposition XIII Why no Wind bloweth perpendicularly from the Air unto the places of the Earth Concerning this question See Aristotle lib. 2. chap. 9. of Meteors Aristotle in his Second Book Chap. 9. of Meteors treateth very absurdly so that the Peripateticks are not agreeing concerning his Opinion neither shall I in this place relate their Sentiments The cause seemeth easily to be explained viz. that the Air being thrust downwards towards the Center of the Earth cannot break through this way by reason that other vapours are expelled or born upwards and therefore the overmuch resistance of the Air which is directly scituated under the Air moved causeth the protrusion to be made to the sides of the place in which the violence beginneth Which is therefore the more probable seeing that the matter of the Wind is for the most part more light than that Air and that is more rarified than that which is more near unto the Earth Proposition XIV Why Westerly-winds are less frequent than Easterly-winds See Proposition 10. The cause of this is manifest from the Tenth Proposition where we have made the Sun to be the first cause of Winds who so rarifieth the Air proceeding from the East to the West and therefore the Air is more thrust towards the West Therefore that this general cause may be impeded of necessity very many Exhalations must consist in the Western quarters which doth happen less frequently Proposition XV. Why the Northern and Eastern-winds are more impetuous and stormy and on the contrary the Southern and Western more relaxed and weak The Northern and Eastern Winds more stormy than the Southern and VVestern The cause is by reason that the Northern Air is more thick by reason of Cold and the Southern in our Zone by reason of the greater dissipation caused by the Sun and Heat is more rarified Now by how much the Air is more rarified by so much the lesser is it carried with an impetuous force Yet you must know that the South-winds are cold dry and violent in the Temperate Zone or the Artick Zone opposed to ours no less than the Northern-winds are unto us but the Eastern-wind is more rigid or more intense for another cause viz. because that it ariseth for the most part from the refraction of the Air made by the Sun which being continually carried from the East to the West the Air also is thrust forwards with the greater violence from the East to the West But it is probable that other causes may accede that may either help or obstruct that violence Proposition XVI Why the Southernly and Westernly-winds are found more hot than the Easternly and Northernly which have a wonderful power of causing Cold in respect of them The Southern and VVestern Winds are found more hot than the Easternly and VVesternly So this Question is wont vulgarly to be propounded yet we must know that in must not generally be understood of all places but only concerning the places of our Zone For in the other temperate Zone scituated towards the South from the Aequator the contrary holdeth true because that in these places the Northern-winds are hot or warm and the Southern are found more cold And so the nature of the thing and the condition of the cause required For the reason why the South-wind is discovered more warm to us and the North more cold proceedeth hence viz. that the South-winds come from a quarter and places more near unto the torrid Zone or way of the Sun but the Northern places more remote from that way of the Sun that is from more cold places But the contrary is found in places scituated towards the Antartick Pole from the Aequator because that the Northern-winds approach to them from the way of the Sun the Southern from the places more near the Pole But as concerning the Eastern and Western-winds I must answer otherwise neither doth that diversity of the places of our Zone and that of the opposite here take place Therefore first it is said in the preceding Proposition that the Western-winds are less frequent in all places the cause of which is the same with that by reason of which the Occidental winds are discovered more warm viz. because that for the most part they blow in the Night and after the setting of the Sun where the Air that is thrust forwards towards our place is more calid or less frigid than the Air of our place which is more remote from the West than that which lieth between the Sun and our place There is also another cause which also is of force in the difference between the Northern and Southern-winds viz. that the Western-winds blow with less violence and not so intense but with some relaxation Now it is known that any Air or Wind is discovered so much the more cold by how much it bloweth with the greater or more intense force although in truth it be no hotter or colder which is evident by our expiration which we can exhale either cold or hot Proposition XVII Why Mariners from the sight of a Cloud especially such a one that is of a pale or duskish colour predict a wind from that quarter also to declare the other signs of future winds Mariners from the sight of a Cloud predict a Wind from that quarter A twofold Reason may be rendred for either Clouds of that colour do shew that by and by they shall be dissipated and dissolved into Blasts or else the Clouds sinking by their own weight and segregated from other Clouds press down the Air beneath them and so cause it to blow Concerning the peculiar Clouds termed by the Dutch the Bulls-eye see the following Chapter 1. The Sun appearing spotted in his rising and lying obscured under a pale or black Cloud foretelleth either showers or winds 2. If that the Sun at his rising appeareth concave so that it shineth
or force in and therefore a general Wind is considered especially in the midst of the Sea most remote from the Land 2. Yet another wind may also blow in the midst of the Sea viz. if that in another a Cloud or other cause generating of a wind be very great From these two Causes it happeneth that a general wind is less or more constant or continual in divers placer Now the general winds are only found in the Sea of the torrid Zone or that which lieth between the Tropicks about the whole Earth yet in some places it extendeth it self without the Tropicks the space of 7 degrees and they are called Eastern that is the East-wind or collateral to the East as the South-East North-East viz. which blow from the East towards the West for the whole year But they do not consist with the like constancy in all the parts of that Sea but in some they are more hindred and in some less They are more constant in the Pacifick Ocean viz. in that part of it which lieth between the Tropicks so that Ships that loose from the Port of Aquapulco in New Spain in America towards the Philippin Isles that is such as steer their course from the East to the West oftentimes for 60 degrees Sail continually without any alteration or furling of the Sail with a constant East or North-East wind neither unto this day hath any Ship in that most long Voyage of 1650 miles been cast away Whence the Mariners say that they may sleep securely in this Voyage neither is there any need of guiding the Ship seeing that the general Wind bringeth the Ship to the wished Port for here other winds do impede the general Wind. The same constancy of this same Easterly wind is found in the Sea from the Cape or Promontory of Good-hope in the bounds of Africa or rather from that procurrent part of Africa which lieth in the Torrid Zone even to Brazil in the midst of which Voyage lieth the Isle of St. Helena unto which Mariners returning from India unto Europe are wont to direct their Course The Isle of St. Helena is distant from the Promontory of Good-hope 350 Miles and is oftentimes accomplished in sixteen days or also in twelve as the general wind is either vehement or slack for in this there is not a perpetual likeness the Sea-men using the same security when that they have first sailed to the Parallel of that Island for the Promontory of Good-hope lieth without the Tropicks which we have said that they use who Sail in the Pacifick Ocean from Aquapulco to the Philippins yea when that they have passed the Promontory of Good-hope they judge themselves to have escaped all danger and variation of the winds and sleep securely the wind constantly filling their Sails towards that Island and Brazil But yet this only is their great care that they may not Sail beyond the Island seeing that it is a very small one for if that they have passed it the eighth part of a mile they cannot regain it viz. an Easterly wind forcing them towards the West therefore then they are forced with great loss of their Voyage to make to the Coasts of Brazil or the other Isle called Ascension to water at If then you demand by what course they Sail when that the Ships make a contrary Voyage in this Sea viz. whilst that they steer from the Philippin Isles unto New Spain or from Brazil and the Isle of St. Helena unto the Promontory of Good-hope whilst that they Sail from India in these Voyages the Reader must know that Mariners use a threefold mode for either they navigate the Sea scituated without the Tropicks therefore they do not touch at the Isle of St. Helena whilst that they Sail from Europe into India or where necessarily they must pass by this they do not directly steer their course from the West to the East but obliquely from the North the Collateral quarter of it to the South or the Collateral quarter of it or lastly they choose such a time of Navigation in which they know that that general wind is impeded often by others But this latter because that it happeneth rarely therefore they rather make choice of the two former Modes of which we sâll speak more in the Chapter of Navigation Therefore there are two Seas of the Torrid Zone in which that general Oriental wind with its Collaterals reigneth throughout the whole year viz. that which lieth between the procurrent of Africa and Brazil the other is that which is extended between New Spain or rather between America and the Oriental Islands of which the Philippins are a part The third part of this Sea under the Torrid Zone viz. between the Procurrent of Africa and the Philippins or Oriental Islands is not indeed destitute of this general wind but oftentimes it is hindred in this Sea by reason of the frequency of Islands which hindrance yet in some places is more frequent than in other some Between Mozambique and India the general wind is of most force in January February March April in other Months other winds do blow of which we shall speak in the following Proposition This general wind is more hindred in the Sea of the Indian Isles At the Isle of Banda in the Month of May the Oriental winds begin to be prevalent being very violent and accompanied with rain at Malacca in September and in other places otherwise as we shall shew in the following Proposition See Proposition 3. Yet this you must know that this general wind doth not equally extend it self in these Seas towards the Tropicks in all parts but that there is a great difference in this For the Tropicks are distant from the Aequator on both sides 23 ½ deg but the general wind may be discovered in one Meridian unto the Latitude of 20 degrees in another Meridian unto 15 in another unto 12. So in the Indian Ocean when in the Months of February and January the East wind or South or South-East bloweth it is not discovered until you come to the 15 degree of Latitude So unto those that Sail from Goa unto the Promontory of Good-hope here a general wind meeteth them at the 12 deg of South Latitude and at the 28 degree of the same Latitude accompanieth them So also Mariners have observed that no general wind bloweth between the 4. degree of Northern Latitude even unto the 10 or 11 deg between Africa and America for when they have Sailed by that wind from St. Helena towards the Aequator even unto the 4 deg of Northern Latitude then are they destitute of that wind even until they come unto the 10 degree of Latitude And from that degree even unto the 30 the North-East is again manifestly found continually to blow although that the 30 degrees be 7 degree from the Torrid Zone Yet notwithstanding in the 6 7 and 8. degree of Parallel Latitude it also bloweth in some places but in
all places almost in the Parallels of the 10 deg even unto the 30 deg North. After the same manner beyond the Tropick of Capricorn in the Sea between the Promontory of Good-hope and Brazile the South-East wind bloweth even unto the 30 deg of Latitude that is 7 degrees beyond the Torrid Zone towards the South and that through the whole year And although as we have said that this general wind is not discovered on all Coasts much less in Mediterranean places yet in some it is sufficiently observable So on the Coasts of Brazile Easterly unto the Coasts of Loango the South-East is a Quotidian wind although that other winds do admin themselves There is a threefold Cause of this continual general wind alledged by Modern Philosophers for both it and the Torrid Zone were unknown to the Antients who have not so much as mentioned it Some Determine that the Sun is the cause of this wind blowing from the East to the West by reason that by its great faculty it rarifyeth the Air in the Torrid Zone and so it thrusteth it forwards from the East to the West seeing that the Sun it self goeth this way Some and those of the Opinion of Pythagoras that Determined the Heaven to stand still and the Earth to moved round some of them I say supposed this general wind to Proceed from hence viz. that whilst the Earth is moved round and the Air with it this less followeth the motion of the Earth but is somewhat more slower to motion and therefore whilst that we are carried with the Earth from the West to the East the Air moved with less celerity to the same quarter seemeth to meet us and to be moved from the East to the West when that yet we do rather meet it See Des Cartes in his 222 Proposition of his Principels Des Cartes alledgeth the third Cause and that altogether new in the 222 Proposition in his Principles Where he endeavoureth to shew that the Moon causeth this motion as well as the motion of the Sea from the East to the West But because that his Opinion cannot be understood except that all his Philosophical Hypotheses should be Explained therefore we shall say nothing concerning it here especially seeing that we shall shew in another place that that Cause is not true I approve of the first Cause the second seemeth therefore not to be received because that many Copernicans approve not of it and no reason can be given why this wind should be found to blow only between the Tropicks or to the 30 deg of Latitude and not in the whole temperate Zone Proposition III. Some Winds are Periodical and fixed others wandering and Erratick Some winds fixed others wandering Those are termed fixed and periodical which blow on certain daies and then cease for a certain number of daies until that they begin to blow again Some return in the space of half a year othersome are Monthly which return in the interval of one or two Months Also the fixed winds are otherwise subdivided viz. some when that they begin to blow continue for some Months others for half a year others for a Month others for a few daies Amongst these those are chiefly observed by Mariners which blow for some Months in certain places of the Sea and they call these winds as also the times wherein such winds blow Motions or Moussons And such Motions are more especially notable in the Indian Ocean from Africa to the Philippine Isles although that they be not wanting in other places there is a very great moment to be placed in the observation of these Motions for Seamen ought to choose the time of them for the Voyage that they intend to that same quarter or that which is collateral unto which that wind bloweth neither to undertake a Voyage to the quarter of this Motion but to expect the contrary Motion For in the parts of the Indian Ocean where that one wind ceaseth to blow for some Months another succeedeth contrary to the former and continueth with the same constancy until that it hath compleated its time and therefore they call these Contrary Motions They term those the time of the mutation of those Motions which intercede between the end of one Mousson and the begining of the contrary For one Motion ceasing another doth not presently begin to blow but some days fall between some times more sometimes fewer also more in some places and fewer in other some And in these intermedial daies in which no certain Motion bloweth the wind is variable the calm dangerous and for the most part the Sea is tossed with uncertain waves and sudden Tempests arise some of these Motions return twice in a year but not with the same vehemency whence Mariners term the one the great Motion the other the lesser 1. In that part of the Atlantick Ocean that lyeth in the Torrid Zone as also that which is in the Temperate Zone the North wind perpetually bloweth in the Months of October Months most fit to taka a Voyage from Europe to India November and January And therefore these Months are chiefly fit to undertake a Voyage in from Europe to India that they may pass the Aequator by the help of those winds For it is manifest by experience that some Ships that have set Sail from Europe in March have arrived no sooner at Brazile than those that have set Sail in October viz. both of them have come thither in the Month of February being helped by the North wind Yet because that this wind is not so continual and certain therefore Mariners are not wont to call it a Motion Neither is it an easie matter to render a cause of this wind in these Months unless you will refer it to copious thick vapours or to a continnual pressure made from thick Clouds But those that have wintered in Nova Zembla testifie that there is a most frequent North wind all the time of the Winter where this effect cannot be ascribed unto the Sun rarifying the Air seeing that he lyeth obscured under the Horizon Yet I suppose that in general the Cause may proceed from the dissolving of Snows or gross Vapours or Clouds collected in the Winter in the Northern and Southern places especially on the Mountains Which I am induced to believe by this Argument more especially because that these Motions blow for the most part from the North and South quarters or the Collateral unto them Therefore by reason that Snow and thick Clouds are dissolved in the Northern places by the Sun especially in that half of the year in which he passeth through the North part of the Ecliptick therefore those Motions shall then be Northernly After the same manner in the Southern or Antartick places for the other half of the year the Sun dissolveth the Snow and the thicker Clouds therefore then the Motion shall be discovered Southerly Now that these Motions blow more from the Sea in the Collateral quarters
North Latitude in the Sea seventy miles from Guinea a South-East wiad predominateth from the 20th of April to the 5th of May but not on the Shoar or in Guinea it self after the 5th of May the same wind is also discovered at the 3 deg and 3 ½ of Latitude 12. At the Isle of Madagascar from the 15th of April unto the last of May the North and North-West wind bloweth but in February and March the winds blow from the East and South 13. In April or May in the tract of Land and Sea from Madagascar to the Promontory of Good-hope the North wind and the wind Collateral to the North blow continually to the East so that it is esteemed a Miracle if that the Southo South-East wind blew for two daies 14. After the 20 of April in the Sea of Bengala the South wind is violent before that day the South-West and North-West and those being very impetuous do predominate 15. There is a Motion for Navigation from Malacca to Maccou in July October November December viz. the South winds and South-West winds and oftentimes the South-East winds but in June and July at the begining the West winds rage about Malacca and in the Sea of China 16. The Motion by which they Sail from Java to China from the West to the East begineth with the Month of May. 17. The Motion by which they Sail from China to Japan from the West to the East is in force in June and July viz. the South-West wind but the North and Collateral wind to the North at the East oftentimes interpose and that especially at the day time but in the night season the South-East and the first Collateral wind at the East do interpose and let 18. A contrary Motion viz. from Japan to Maccou from the East to the West is in February and March viz. the East and North-East winds but these predominate not in the Sea but on the Coasts of China which those that Sail in that Voyage from Japan observe they term them the Winds over the Land 19. The motion by which they Sail from the Phillippine Isles or China to Aquaepulco in America viz. the Western winds are observed in June July and August but they are very weak except in the Full Moon now they are the South-West winds but they avoid the Torrid Zone and choose the Coasts of America Septentrional is to shun the wind that is general from the East which yet then is less vehement This therefore must be known in general that the Occidental Motions or West winds are more weak than the Oriental because that these are helped by a general wind but these are diminished by it 20. In the Sea of China a South and South-West Motion reigneth in July August and October But if that these winds be changed into an Oriental Motion they never presently return to the South but first to the North hence when they have blowed some daies they return to the East and lastly to the South sometimes the North-East is immediately changed into the South-West sometimes presently from the North to the South and that here is sufficiently frequent So in the Sea anniversary winds are more constant unto which I add those that are less constant and those which on the Coasts and also on Maritimate places are observed to be Anniversary Proposition IV. The Etesian winds so termed that are Anniversary in Grece proceed from Rain and Snow dissolved on the Mountains Of Etesian winds and from what they proceed The Grecians observed a twofold kind of Winds on every Year which were Stated and termed Etesian winds Viz. 1. Those in the Summer or Canicular winds which they called by the General term Etesiae because that they were more strong and sensible 2. The Winter winds which they called the Chelidonii or Ornithiae The Canicular Etesian winds are Northern in the placing of the begining of which to a certain Writers do much differ When that Aristotle had added that they blow after the Summer Solstice he mentioneth nothing of the true time which certainly is a very great negligence which at length he augmenteth where making mention of the Ornithiae he omitteth both the time and the quarter of these winds but those that have noted the time of the Etesian winds they have observed that the forerunners of them begin to blow either on the 6 of July or on the 15 of July at the rising of the Canicular or Dog Star Now those winds blow 40 daies the whole space of the Dog dates and therefore end with the Month of August but others extend them to September they only blow in the day and cease in the night therefore Mariners formerly called them the sleepy and delicate winds The cause of these winds questionless is the dissolving of the Snow caused by the heat of the Sun on the Northern Mountains which at that time is very great by reason that now for divers Months together almost he hath continually shined on those Mountains without any setting and with this cause it aptly agrees that the Etesian winds cease on the night because that then the resolution of the Snow ceaseth or at least is lesser than the generation of the wind requireth because that the Sun then is over or near the Horizon or else setteth wholly The same Northern Canicular wind is not only in Greece but also in Thrace Macedonia the Aegean Sea and the Isles of the same all which Regions are sometimes comprehended under the general term of Greece yea in Aegypt also and it is probable that the wind which we have said in the former Proposition bloweth in Congo scituate beyond the Aequator that that wind that bloweth from the North between March and September is the same with these Etesian winds of the Grecians or at least proceed from the same cause as also that North wind which we have said bloweth in the same Months in the Kingdom of Guzurat from March to September these I say we ought to Determine to proceed from the dissolved Snows of the Mountains of Asia termed the Sarmatian Mountains and the Girdle of the World and therefore we reckon it amongst the Motions The second Anniversary wind of the Grecians is the Chelidonian which they relate to begin after Winter but have not noted the day of the beginning Now these are South winds contrary to the Canicular or Etesian winds and very weak without violence Moreover inconstant and not so continual whence they render the Sea calm Aristotle relateth that they blow by Course even unto the middle of Summer until the Northern Canicular Etesian winds begin but that they are not so much discerned The Cause also of these winds is the dissolving of the Snow on the Mountains of Monomotapa which Snow the Sun rarifyeth because that in the time of Winter and that of Greece they have Summer the Sun passing through the Southern parts of the Zodiack and this wind is also found in Congo Aegypt and the Aegean
is said to be like unto it then after a while the Cloud augmenteth and extendeth it self over the whole plain of the Mountain Then on a sudden an Ecnephias breaketh forth from the top of the Mountain with so great violence that it over-setteth and sendeth to the bottom Ships that are unprovided and not well strengthned but Sea-men being now more cautious when that they once discover that Bulls or Oxes-eye presently depart from the Shoar as far as they can and then furl their Sails and use other Artifices to preserve their Ships neither doth this Prognostick ever fail therefore they fly this deadly Banquet After the same mode an Ecnephias rageth at Terra de Nata the Bulls-eye fore-runing it by which many Ships have been cast away And so it is also in that whole tract between that and and the Promontory of Good-hope In Dauphin in France not far from Vienna is a high Mountain on the top of which is a standing-Pool from whence all Tempests seem to arise in these places on the top of it is procreated a Cloudy exhalation which foresheweth immediately Thunder or Storms to succeed In the Sea between America and Africa and near the Aequator such Ecnephiae and Travados are frequent especially in those Months in which no Winds blow constantly or if they do it is very seldom viz. throughout the whole year especially in April May and June in other Months it is more rare and they are very observable on the Coasts of Guinea The Portugals as I have said call them Travados which word also the Dutch keep but the Inhabitants of Guinea call them Agremonte They often happen viz. three or four times in a day by and by they cease for they continue for the most part above an hour and a half but the first shock is very violent They break out of black and dusty Clouds the Sky being clear at hand By their assistance Sea-men oftentimes pass the Aequator because that other continual Winds are often wanting there especially in those three Months neither do they hinder Ships to sail except at the first onset But in the Sea that is near to that part of Africa in which the Kingdom of Loango is scituated there is a frequent Ecnephias in January February March and April so on the Promontory of Africa called by the Ancients Aromata and now Guardafu not far from the Mouth of the Red Sea in May every year the North-wind rageth and a most violent Ecnephias For you must know that as some Anniversary winds are less violent so also Tempests and Ecnephiae are Anniversary in some places In such an Ecnephias not far from that place the Portugal Admiral Sodrens was lost Anno 1505 who being forewarned by the Africans would not follow good Advice But in the Mouth of this Arabian Sea as also in Arabia and Aethiopia a peculiar and wonderful Ecnephias doth somewhat happen viz. a thick and black Cloud mixed with Nubicular flames like to a burning Furnace dismal to behold cloudeth the day in darkness of an instant a Storm breaketh forth the rage or which is by and by pacified but it casteth forth red Sand in great abundance on the Land and Sea so that the Arabians say that it hath often happened that such Storms of Sand have overwhelmed the Annual Company of Merchants and Travellers with their Camels they term them Carawanen Caravans or Cassila viz. every year once or twice Merchants being met together from divers parts of Asia in Syria go from Aleppo into Arabia about six thousand persons by reason that the wonted Robberies of the Arabians and the difficulty of the way cause them to fear to Travel alone which also they do from India to China and Tartary and thence they say that the Mumia of the Arabians and Aegyptians hath its original Viz. those Bodies covered with the drifts of Sand are-dried up by the great heat of the Sun Now this Ecnephias ariseth from the Northern quarter into which the Red-Sea is extended and therefore it is probable that seeing so great a quantity of this Sand is sound on the shoar of this Sea that it is raised aloft by the Wind and that thence that Red colour is seen in the Clouds and thence also the Sand is ejected from the Clouds That such an Ecnephias ariseth in Lybia by reason of the great quantity of Sand is not improbable and was in some measure known to the Ancients who therefore writ That the access to the famous Temple of Jupiter Ammon in Lybia was difficult neither were they altogether ignorant of the generation of Mumia Twistius a Dutch-man that lived a long time in India saith that in the Kingdom of Guzurat Clouds of Sand or an huge quantity of Dust that are elevated by the heat of the Sun do oftentimes overwhelm the Travellers Now we must speak of the Causes of this Tempestuous wind whence the Ecnephias proceedeth It is evident that it breaketh forth of a Cloud Now there are two Modes by which such a Wind may seem to be generated from a Cloud 1. If that a Cloud tending downwards by its gravity striketh the Air with a great force as we discover by Experience if that stretched forth Sails fall the Air is moved with an impetus And thence it cometh to pass that by how much the Cloud or Bulls-eye appeareth less by so much the Storm is the greater that followeth viz. because that the Cloud is more high and therefore appeareth small and descending down from a higher place it more vehemently striketh the Air the other is the motion of the generation if that the Wind included in the Cloud breaketh forth suddenly or by reason of some fire or Sulphureous matter the way being rendred strait and other outlets being restrained the Vapours strike as from a Vessel of a narrow mouth containing water if that it be heaped the wind breaketh forth but the first cause seemeth more probable Proposition XI An Exhydrias is a Wind breaking from a Cloud with great abundance of water A Wind called an Exhydrias It is little different from an Ecnephias but that the Cloud from whence it seemeth to break is now condensed into water and so long upheld by other circumstantial Clouds and peradventure forced into one by the winds until by its ponderosity it rusheth downwards and strikes the Air whence a great Wind proceedeth But these Exhydrias are very rare yet the Ecnephias hath for the most part Rains Showers or thick Clouds accompanying him and therefore only differeth from the Exhydrias according to the more or the less For a Nimbus is nothing else but a Wind with a violent Rain and therefore is more general than an Ecnephias but an Exhydrias oftentimes falleth perpendicularly from the top Proposition XII A Typhon is a violent Wind passing swiftly through all the quarters about a place and for the most part rushing from the top A VVind called a Typhon The Saracens call it Olifant the
Indians Orancan It is often in the Oriental Sea especially in the Sea of Sian China and Japan between Malacca and Japan This violently breaking almost from the Western quarter and being whirled about the Horizon with a rapid course perfects its circumference by continual increase in the space of twenty hours raising those vast Seas with an horrid violence and swellings the Billows beating one another take away all hope of safety from the Mariners and so both by reason of these Typhons and also other Storms sailing from India to Japan is very dangerous so that it is accounted an happy Voyage if that one Ship of three keepeth its course At the Autumnal Season a most furious Typhon doth especially predominate and that often with so great violence that those that have not seen it can hardly believe it so that it is no wonder that some mighty Ships have been weakned by those great Waves you would think in this Storm that Heaven and Earth would meet Neither doth it only rage on the Sea but also on the Shoars and overwhelmeth many Houses and throweth up huge Trees by the roots and forceth great Ships from the Sea on the Land for about a quarter of a mile The Mariners term it a Wind that runneth round the Compass In the Indian Ocean it seldom continueth above six hours and maketh the Sea so level at the first as if that it were plained but on a sudden horrible Waves do follow So about the City Ardibil in Persia in June and July every day when that the Sun is at his Meridian height a Whirlwind ariseth for an hour by which a great dust is raised Questionless the cause of a Typhon is that a wind breaking forth with violence from some one quarter towards another findeth an obstruction in this and therefore is wreathed and turned into it self as we see that if water be suddenly moved if that an obstacle be put in its way it moveth in a round suddenly and with a force It may be that a Typhon may arise from opposite winds blowing together violently which render the superficies of the Sea so plain and comprehend the Ships in the middle If that it rush from above it is called Caetegis and then it maketh the Sea so plain as if that it had been plained but presently mighty Floods or Waves arise Proposition XIII Whether that some Winds break forth from the Earth or Water Of VVinds breaking forth from the Earth or VVater We easily apprehend that this may easily be seeing that Cavities are here and also Winds Sulphureous substances and Moisture Now nothing hinders but that a gust sufficiently vehement may be there generated viz. if that it be any thing hindred as it is procreated to go forth or if that it be presently generated in a great quantity as much as the winds require If that the Outlet be hindred an Earthquake is generated or a wind with a violent force maketh wey for it self and thrusts forwards the Earth So oftentimes a Smoak breaketh forth from the Earth in the Isles of Maarice so also from some Caves In Japan is a Fountain breaking forth at certain hours of the day with great noise Yet I do not remember that I have read of any Wind breaking forth out of the Sea Proposition XIV Whether that a certain Wind may arise from the flowing of the Sea and of the Rivers Of a VVind that floweth from the Sea and Rivers Experienced testifieth that in those places where the flux and reflux of the Sea is discovered if at any time the Air be free from other winds from the most part with the water flowing from the Sea a wind also bloweth from the Sea Therefore it seemeth probable that the Air by reason of the contiguity is carried with the water to the same quarter But this should be more diligently observed Whether when that the Air is still the same wind is discovered with the afflux of the Sea I think yet that another cause of this Wind may be given viz. that the Air is forced from the place by the flowing water Now the Air is much moved at a very little impression so they will have the Air moved with the Rivers that run swiftly Proposition XV. Why Ignes fatui Castor and Pollux and Helena are amongst Tempests The Portugals call them Corpo Santo the Spaniards St. Elmo Now not only one but many are oftentimes beheld in Ships at the Masts wandring with an uncertain motion as other Ignes fatui although that sometimes they may seem to fix on the Sails and Masts But sometimes leaping up and down they appear like a flame or a Candle burning obscurely If that four such vicine Lights be seen the Portugals term them Cora de Nostra Seneora the Crown of our Blessed Lady or Virgin Mary And these they account of as a most certain sign of the Tempests to cease The cause of those Fires is a Sulphureous part full of Bitumen forced downwards through that great motion of the Air and forced or fired into one by agitation or congregation So we see by agitation that the Butter of Milk is separated from this Phaenomenon is also collected that for the most part those violent Tempests proceed from a Sulphureous spirit rarefying and moving the Clouds Proposition XVI Why there is so frequent a Calm in the Sea near Guinee and under the Aequator in the Atlantick Ocean between America and Africa Frequent ' Calms in the Atlantick Ocean This is one of the Phaenomenons about Winds of no small difficulty That at Guinee which is two degrees from the Aequator and under the Aequator is almost a perpetual Calm especially in April May and June where no motions are found there when that no such thing is observed in other parts of the Ocean scituate under the Aequator Indeed an Ecnephias is sometimes sufficiently frequent there but this also is desired oftentimes by the Sea-men because that by the force of frequent Ecnephiae they endeavour to sail beyond the Aequator For it happeneth very often that Ships sailing from Europe to India are detained a whole Month at the Aequator before that they can pass it Now especially they avoid the Coasts of Guinee and the Calm there and therefore with some hindrance to their Voyage they sail towards Brazil yea some Ships are detained here for three Months before that they can depart from the Coasts into the Mid-Sea I have not yet found out the cause of the Phaenomenon unless perchance this be it that Snows are found intercepted in no Mountains of Africa between Guinee and Barbary which may generate the Winds Proposition XVII In some Regions the Tempests are Anniversary Of Tempests Anniversary in some Regions We have given some Examples of these in our former Propositions viz. 1. Concerning the mutation of Motions 2. Concerning our Ecnephias 3. Concerning a Typhon 4. At the Promontory of Good-hope in June and July 5. In the Isle
this his entrance doth not happen on the 21th of every Month but in some Months before and in some after Therefore when we desire to know the precise place of the Sun we must look for it in an Ephemerides or in our Almanacks The place of the Sun is found also in the wooden Horizon of the Artificial Globe for every day of the year when one may search when the Globe is at hand for it is a grand fault in a learned or knowing person to be ignorant of the Motion of the Sun seeing that from thence all the seasons of the year also the days and nights with many other things do depend of all which there is great use in the life of man CHAP. XXIII Of the Latitude of places and the Elevation of the Pole Proposition I. The Latitude of a place in the Superficies of the Earth is the distance of the same from the Aequator Of the Latitude of the Earth Now a Perpendicular Line or Arch drawn from the place given to the Aequator measureth this distance and by reason that the Meridian of every place is perpendicular to the Aequator therefore the Latitude of the place is the Arch of the Meridian of that place intercepted between the place and the Aequator The Longitude of the Earth This is termed the Latitude of the Earth whose extension is in the Superficies from one Pole to the other as the Longitude of the Earth is the extension of the same returning from the West by the East unto the West which is the same with the Aequinoctial Line Proposition II. The Elevation of the Pole of any place or above the Horizon of any place is called the Arch of the Celestial Meridian of that place intercepted between one or other Celestial Pole and the Horizon of that place Elevation of the Pole It may also be said to be the Arch of the Terrestrial Meridian intercepted between one or other of the Poles of the Earth and the Horizon For by this Mode it may be more justly desired if that the Earth cause the first motion but Astronomers for the most part apply the definition to the imaginary Celestial Pole Proposition III. To find the Latitude of a place given in the Superficies of the Globe of the Earth in degrees and minutes if that the Globe be great the same Latitude in Geographical Maps For the finding the Latitude of a place by a Globe or by Maps In a Globe let the place given be brought to the Meridian and let the degrees be numbred from the Aequator to the place they shall be the sought for Latitude of the place In Geographical Maps if the Map consists of Right lines let a Right line be drawn through the place given parallel to the Aequator except it be already drawn in the Map or let a Rule only be applied to the place so that it be parallel to the Aequator and so the bounds of this Line in the Side-lines of the Map will shew the Latitude of the place But if the Map be of Crooked lines so that no parallel can pass through by the place given one foot of the Compass shall be placed in the Pole of the Map and the other foot in the place given and in this space the Parallel of the place to be described in the Side-line again will shew the Latitude of the place if that the Parallels be described from the Pole Also the distance of the place from the Pole may be found out Proposition IV. The Place being given in the Superficies of the Globe so to constitute the Globe that the Wooden Horizon may be the Horizon of that place Let the Place given be brought to the Meridian and let 90 degrees be numbred from it towards the adjoyning Pole in the Meridian Let the term of the Numeration be placed in the Crena of the Horizon so the Wooden Horizon shall be the Horizon of the place proposed Nevertheless in the Corollary of the following Proposition we shall shew an easier method of performing the fame Proposition V. The Latitude of the Place is equal to the Altitude or Elevation of the Pole above the Horizon of that place This is shewed by the Globe thus Take a place as you please in the Superficies of the Globe then so place the Globe that the Wooden Horizon may be the Horizon of the place Now let the degrees of Latitude of the place and the Elevation of the Pole be numbred and they will be found equal The Theoried shewed by a Mathematical Demonstration See Scheme The Theorem is thus shewed by a Mathematical Demonstration Let C be the Center of the Earth L and place in the Superficies P the Poles H P L Z shall be the Meridian and H Z the Diameter of the Horizon P H the Elevation of the Pole Q T the Diameter of the Aequator or the Section of the Meridian and the Aequator and P Q shall be the Quadrant of the Meridian or of 90 degrees because that P is the Pole of the Aequator For the former reason L H shall be the Arch of 90 degrees because L is the Pole of the Horizon Therefore L H is the Arch of an equal Arch P Q and the common part L P being taken away the remainder of the Arch P H L Q will be equal The Latitude of any place being known you have also the Elevation of the Pole for the same place Now the distance of a place from the Pole and the distance from the Aequator joyned together makes 90 degrees wherefore one being known the other is also A Place being given in the Superficies of the Globe to elevate the Pole so that the elevation of the Place requireth the elevation of the Pole This is the same with what was propounded in the preceding Proposition viz. to cause that the Wooden Horizon become the Horizon of the place given First find out the Latitude of the Place and let the Latitude be numbred from the Pole in the Meridian descending downwards towards the Horizon Let the Terminus of the Numeration be constituted in the Crena of the Horizon so the Pole will be elevated as the scituation of the Place given requireth Proposition VI. A Place being given in the Superficies of the Globe or the Latitude of any Place being given to shew all the Places of the Earth which may have the same Latitude or distance from the Aequator or Elevation of the Pole Or to find all the places of the Earth which may have the distance given from the Aequator Further Rules to be observed concerning the Latitude of places In the Globe Let the Place given be brought to the Brazen Meridian or let the Latitude given be numbred from the Aequator in the Meridian towards the Pole then let a pointed Chalk be applied unto the term of the Numeration and turn the Globe round so the Chalk will describe the Periphery which shall
contain all the places whose Latitude is the same with the Place given In Maps of strait Lines let a strait Line be drawn through the Place given parallel to the Aequator all the Places through which that Line passeth shall have the same Latitude with the place given In Maps of Crooked lines let the Periphery be described passing the place given from the Pole of the Maps as from a Center so by the same means as before the Places sought for shall be found But if no certain Place but a Latitude be given let one fool of the Compass be placed in the Pole of the Map and the other on the side Line to the degree of Latitude and then the Parallel shall be described Proposition VII To find the Meridian or the Plaga and point of the North and South in the given place of the Earth or in the given plane There are divers ways by which the Line fought for may be found Rules for the finding the Meridian First The most easie Mode is that which maketh use of the Magnetical Needle For seeing that the Magnetical Needle or Needle of the Compass with one extream looketh to the South and the other to the North the extension of it will shew the Meridian Line But because in very few places it hath respect to the Northern and Southern Point or Clime and in very many declineth from them as we shall shew elsewhere See in Chapter the 38th therefore the Meridian line is not accurately found by that but only an adjoyning line which although it may serve when the matter is not much material for which we desire it yet in concernment of greater moment it may be the cause of a great errour First draw the Line which the Magnetical Needle sheweth then taking any point in this Line let the Periphery of the Circle be described from it as from a Center in the which let the Degrees of the Declination of the Needle be numbred beginning from the false drawn Meridian Line and that towards the East if the given Declination be towards the West and contrariwise towards the West if the given Declination be towards the East Lastly let a straight Line be drawn through the term of the Numeration of the Center of the Periphery This shall be the true Meridian Line The Mariners Compass useful There is no need of this labour if that you have the Mariners Compass at hand in the which the Declination of the Magnetick Needle is corrected to the place proposed Secondly The Meridian Line is more accurately found out by the benefit of the Stars The Meridian Line found by the Staââ First when the Sun shineth a style or pin being erected the shadow of it will shew the Meridian Line But by reason that it is not safe to conside in Dyals therefore this mode is not altogether accurate and it sheweth a true Line yet a little distance from the true Thirdly A Periphery being drawn in a plain given let a style or pin be erected from the Center of the same and let the term of the Shadow before the Meridies be noted or first the extremity of the Shadow being noted let the Periphery or Circumserence be described by the extremity of the Shadow from the place of the style Then you must expect so long after the Meridies until the extremity of the Shadow touch the same Periphery The Latitude being known the Meridian Line by the help of the Globe may be sound out Fourthly If that the Elevation of the Pole or Latitude in the place of the Observation be known we may be the benefit of the Globe find out the Meridian Line by this means First by observation let the Altitude of the Sun above the Horizon be found out then let a strait Line be drawn on a plain in which the Sun then seemeth to be and a point being taken as a Center in this Line whatsoever it be the Periphery is described then let the Pole be elevated in the Globe according to the elevation of the place given let the place of the Sun in the Ecliptick for the day given be noted let the Quadrant be applied to the Vertex and in that let the observed Altitude of the Sun be marked Then let the Globe and the Quadrant be moved together until the point of the Quadrant and the noted place of the Sun do meet The Globe thus remaining let the intercepted Degrees between the Meredian and the Quadrant of the Verrical point be numbred in the wooden Horizon let so may Degrees be cut off in the Periphery before described beginning from the Line of the Plaga of the Sun towards the East or West as the time of the observation shall be and let a right Line be drawn through the term or bound of the Resection and Center of the Circle This shall be the true Meridian Line The invention will be far more easie and without the use of the Vertical Quadrant if the Plaga be observed or a Line drawn in the plain in which the Sun either rising or setting is beheld For then a Circle being again described let the place of the Sun be brought to the Horizon and let the intercepted Degrees between the place of the Sun and the North or South be numbred let so many Degrees be cut off in the Periphery described from the Line drawn and let a right Line be drawn through the term or bound of the Resection and Center This shall be the true Meridian Line Proposition VIII To place a Globe so that the Cardines of the same may respect the Cardines of the Earth that is that the Brazen Meridian may be seated in the true Meridian of the place Of the placing the Globe Let the Meridian Line be found in that plain on which the Globe standeth and let the Globe be so placed that the Brazen Meridian may exactly hang over the Meridian line so the Globe shall be fixed according to the Plagas or Climates of the World Or let the Mariners Compass be placed at the foot of the Globe and let the Globe with its foot so long be moved in the plain until the Brazen Meridian and the Meridian line of the Compass be found to be in the same plain so the Globe shall be again constituted according to the Plaga or Climates of the Earth that is so that the North part of the Globe shall have respect to the North part of the Earth the South to the South East to the East and West to West A Problem may be propounded concerning Geographical Maps and the use is also in the Art of Navigation viz. so to place them on a plain that the Northern places of them may look towards the North of the Earth the Southern to the South and the like The Solution is easie if that a Meridian line may be found in that plain or if you have an accurate Mariners Compass for the Side line of the Map
great concernment yet it is better to begin from the Aequator that all the places may lie in some Climate Proposition XV. To shew the use of the Table of the Climates 1. The Latitude of some place or Elevation of the Pole being given to know the quantity of the Longest day in that place and the Climate in which it lieth Let the given Elevation of the Pole be sought in the Table and on the opposite Region we shall find both the quantity of the Longest day as also the Climate and the Parallel If that the given Elevation cannot be found in the Table then take that Elevation which is less near or the like which is found in the Table From the Longitude of the Longest day of any place to know the Latude of the place and the Parallel and Climate 2. The Longitude of the Longest day of any place being given which any person hath observed or received by relation to know from thence the Latitude of that place the Parallel and the Climate in which that place lieth Enter the Table with the Latitude given and you shall see on the opposite Region both the Latitude and the Place demanded as also the Climate and Parallel 3. A Climate being given to determine the Longitude of the Longest day and the Elevation of the Pole This is facil from the very sight of the Table CHAP. XXVI Of the Light Heat Cold Rains in the diverse parts of the Earth or Zones and other properties of the Zones Proposition I. These Causes are efficacious to generate and procure Light Heat Cold and Rain with other Meteors in the places of the Earth and the vicine Air. Of the causes of Heat 1. THe more or less or no obliquity of the Rays of the Sun coming to or emitted on any place For the Rays falling perpendicular on any place cause great heat and the other Rays sliding obliquely have for that very reason a less power of heating by how much the obliquity of them is the greater that is by how much the more they decline from the perpendicular Ray. 2. The diurnal stay of the Sun above the Horizon of the place For the same heat maketh more hot and changeth the Air in a longer time than in a shorter 3. The depression of the Sun beneath the Horizon being more or less in the Night season For this difference of depression causeth that either more or less Light is perceived in the Air also more or less Heat Rain thick Clouds Hitherto belongeth the Twilight 4. The more or less Elevation of the Moon above the Horizon the more or less depression of the same beneath the Horizon the more or less Diurnal stay of the same above the Horizon The Causes are the same with those alledged in the three foregoing Paragraphs The Planets and fixed Stars raise Vapours c. in the Air. 5. The same may be said of fixed Stars especially of those more noted ones and of the five other Planets Saturn Jupiter Mars Venus and Mercury For they generate some light and heat in the Air although it be but little and change the Air divers ways and raise Vapours if that we may credit Astronomers 6. The propriety or species of the Earth of every place For where the Earth is more stony and rocky there for the most part it is more Cold than where it is sulphureous and fat and here again it is more fertilâ Where there is much Sand and no Rivers there is greater Heat Fumes and Mists proceed from Lakes 7. Lakes or the Sea adjacent From thence also Fumes and Mists are raised more moist and frequent in the Air and the Rays are less powerfully reflected from the Sea than from the Earth 8. The scituation of Places For the Sun acteth otherwise on Mountains and Mountainous places than on Valleys and Plains Moreover Mountains hinder the free access of the Rays of the Sun to the subject places for to them the Vapours of the Air are in some sort attracted See Chap. 20. whence the Mountains change the seasons of the adjacent places as Heat Rain and the like For these would be otherwise in the Subject places if that the Mountains were absent The Winds cause difference in the weather 9. The Winds especially the general So the Etesian winds temperate and allay the Canicular heat A general Wind in the Torrid Zone especially the Subsolan winds in Brasilia render the Heat temperate when in Africa which is Occidental the Heat is vehement because these places feel not so general a Wind. The Northern winds are cold and dry the Southern warm and moist in our places 10. Clouds Rain and Fogs take away and diminish light and heat I suppose that there are not many causes of this variety in light and heat c. which is observed in divers places of the Earth or also in the same places but yet in a different time or season Proposition II. How are the Seasons of the year Spring Summer Autumn and Winter to be defined The four Seasons of the Year Although in Sciences we ought not to contend and dispute concerning Definitions yet because certain Homonymes or Likenesses do here occur without the Explication of which there will arise much confusion in the following Doctrine therefore I will so propose this Question that you may the more cautiously avoid this Homonyme that they may not be deceived and intangled by the same The Question comprehendeth two difficulties first Whether these Seasons ought to be defined from the entrance of the Sun and his stay in certain sings of the Ecliptick and Zodiack According to Astronomers and Astrologers For so Astronomers and Astrologers commonly do saying that that is the Spring whilst the Sun moveth from the first degree of Aries to the first of Cancer that is Summer whilst the Sun moveth from the first of Cancer to the first of Libra that is Autumn whilst the Sun moveth from the first of Libra to the first of Capricorn and that is Winter whilst the Sun moveth from the first of Capricorn to the first degree of Aries Now it is manifest that these Definitions are not general and agreeable to all places because they are only of force in the Northern places scituated from the Aequator towards the Pole Artick and not in the Southern so that for these Definitions the same persons bring Definitions contrary to the former saying that in these places the Spring beginneth from the first degree of Libra proceeding unto the first of Capricorn the Summer from the first of Capricorn to the first of Aries the Autumn from the first of Aries to the first of Cancer and the Winter from the first of Cancer to the first of Libra But from thence it would follow that those Seasons cannot possibly be defined which is false and Generals ought to be defined by Generals Secondly Definitions so made cannot have place in the places of the Torrid Zone
for when the Sun passeth through the Vertex of those places then every one will then confess that there ought to be Summer except some other cause obstructed in respect of the Celestial cause and so in places scituated in the Aequator the Spring or Summer ought not to be in the entrance of the Sun into the first degree of Aries or Libra but rather the Summer because then he passeth through the Vertex of those places and causeth great heat except some other cause hinders Neither can the Summer be transferred unto the first degree of Cancer or Capricorn The same also holdeth concerning places scituated between the Aequator and the Tropicks because the Sun passeth through their Vertex before that he draweth near to the first degree of Cancer or Capricorn and therefore first causeth the Summer there For we must know that although Definitions may be free yet seeing that by the common notions of all Nations they define the Summer by Heat and the Winter by Cold or at least by a lesser degree of Heat and so the Definitions ought to be made that they may render as little as may be from these Notions and in no sort be contrary to them The same difficulty is concerning the Spring and Autum of the places of the Torrid Zone yea they do not seem to have place here especially in places which lye in the Aequator Of Heats and Cold. The second difficulty for which this Question is proposed is this Whether the Seasons are to be defined from the very degree of heat and cold viz. the Spring Summer Autumn and Winter or from the access or recess of the Sun For the common notion of the Men of Europe which they form concerning those Seasons or in which they do conceive them comprehendeth both although they have more respect to heat than cold But Astronomers are more attentive to the access and recess or entrance of the Sun into certain Signs of the Zodiack as we have said before Moreover it is observed in many places of the Torrid Zone that those Seasons answer not the access and recess of the Sun but that contrary to the Celestial motion of the Sun they are tried by a Winter raging not with cold but with storms and rains when they should have Summer by reason of the vicinity of the Sun and on the contrary they have Summer when the Sun is remote when they should have Winter of which more anon and so those People define not the Summer and Winter by the access of the Sun and his entrance into certain Signs but they define the Summer by its serenity and the Winter by its rain and somewhat cold Air. And so it is impossible to make definitions of the Spring Summer Autumn and Winter as to be general and agreeable to all these places according to the notions of the People These difficulties thus considered I thus think First seeing that in many places of the Torrid Zone as we have spoken in the second difficulty and also some certain places of the Temperate Zones Heat and Cold happen contrary to the Celestial mode or motion of the Sun yet notwithstanding those definitions cannot be made accurately by Heat and Cold therefore these terms of the Seasons must be distinguished as being Homonymical so that we must make some Seasons to be Celestial and others Terrestrial I confess these terms to be less fit but the want of better doth compel me to use them so that it is termed the Terrestrial Summer of any place in which in that place a great heat is caused every year by the Sun but the Celestial Summer is termed that season of the year wherein a great heat ought to be in that place by reason of the vicinity of the Sun So that is termed the Celestial Winter of a place in which season Cold should be in that place by reason of the great distance of the Sun but that season is termed the Terrestrial Winter of any place in which there is very great Cold in that place every year And although in many places the Celestial and Terrestrial Winter happen in one season of the year as also the Celestial and Terrestrial Summer yet there are some places of the Torrid Zone where they observe divers seasons of the year as we shall shew in the following discourse The same should be said of the Celestial and Terrestrial Spring and likewise of the Autumn Secondly Seeing that there are few places where the Terrestrial Summer and Winter differ from the Celestial in the season of the year but in most places fall in with the same time of the year therefore the Celestial Summer may be absolutely termed the Summer so also the Winter the Spring and the Autumn But when we speak of the Terrestrial we must add the word Terrestrial but where we simply say the Summer the Winter Spring and Autumn we are to understand the Celestial seasons agreeing with the Terrestrial But how shall we make distinct and accurate definitions of the Summer viz. the Celestial the Winter the Spring and the Autumn so that they may be general for all places and also take place in the Torrid Zone I know no other Mode whereby such definitions may be made but only this The definitions of the sous Seasons of the year 1. The Celestial Summer of any place is that season of the year whose beginning is that day in the Meridies of which the Sun hath the least distance from the Vertex of the place and that in the first season if the Sun become vertical to that place in two seasons The end that day in whose Meridies the Sun receiveth a moderate distance from the first Vertex of that place or whether it be lesser than that of all other days of the year 2. That is termed the Winter of any place the beginning of which is that day in whose Meridies the Sun obtaineth the greatest distance from the Vertex of that place And the end that day in whose Meridies the Sun acquireth a moderate distance from the Vertex of that place 3. That season is termed the Spring of any place which falleth between the end of the Winter and the beginning of the Summer or whose beginning is that day in the Meridies of which the Sun hath acquired a moderate distance from the Vertex when he hath come from a great distance And the end is that day where in whose Meridies the Sun hath acquired a very small distance from the first Vertex of the place 4. The Autumn of any place is termed that season of the year falling between the end of Summer and the beginning of Winter or whose beginning is that day in the Meridies of which the Sun receiveth a mean distance from the Vertex of the place coming from a lesser And the end that day in the Meridies of which the Sun hath obtained a very great distance from the Vertex of the place According to these
termed the Longitude of the Twilight in which either before the rising of the Sun or after his setting some light is discovered in the Air. For the finding the Longitude of the Twilight by the Globe of any place and day of the year For the finding out of the quantity of this time we must suppose that which is observed by Astronomers as we have said in the nineteenth Chapter that the morning twilight beginneth for the most part if the Air be serene the Sun drawing nigh to the eighteenth degree of depression beneath the Horizon and the evening endeth when the Sun hath come to that degree of depression Let therefore the Pole be elevated for the Latitude of the place given and let the place of the Sun in the Ecliptick being found from the day of the year be sought in the Ecliptick of the Globe and let his opposite point be noted then let the Quadrant be applied to the Vertex and the point noted be found to the Horizon the Index to the twelfth hour of the Cycle then let the Globe be turned round until the noted point be elevated 18 degrees above the Horizon which is known by the help of the Quadrant for so shall the place of the Sun be depressed so many degrees beneath the Horizon and the Index in the Cycle shall shew how many hours or parts of an hour the serenity of the Air being laid down the twilight continueth that day in the place given It is convenient by three examples to learn the use of this Problem choosing a place for one of the Torrid Zone another of the Temperate and a third of the Frigid Zone Proposition VIII In places of the Torrid Zone the twilights are small very long in those of the Frigid and moderate in those of the Temperate Zone Of the difference of the Twilights in the several Zones For in places of the Aequator and those near the Crepusculum according to the Hypothesis laid down in the former Proposition is of about one hour which yet experience testifieth is only half an hour or little more because the more thick and gross Air is not so high there as is required to make the twilight to the 18 degree of depression both also because the Hypothesis of the 18 degree is to be taken concerning very small light with which the twilight beginneth such as yet is not accounted by the Vulgar for a twilight In the Frigid Zone the twilights continue for many days when the Sun remaineth beneath their Horizon In the Temperate Zone it continueth 3 4 5 and 6 hours and in some places all night and in the days of the Summer according as the places are more or less nigh the Frigid Zone All these are proved by the Mode proposed in the precedent Proposition Proposition IX A place being given in the Temperate or Frigid Zone and another in the Torrid Zone and moreover the day of the year being given to find out the hour of the place of the Torrid Zone in which hour the Sun may have the Altitude above the Horizon of that place and so strike that place with his rayes equally elevated as great as it hath in the place of the Temperate Zone in the Meridies it self Let the Pole be elevated for the Latitude of the place of the Temperate or Frigid Zone and let the place of the Sun found from the day given be brought to the Meridian and the Altitude of it reckoned for this is the Altitude of the rayes heating that place and illustrating it in the Meridies Then let the Pole be elevated for the Latitude of the place given in the Torrid Zone let the Quadrant be applied to the Vertex and let the degree of Altitude before found out be noted in it let the place of the Sun be brought to the Meridian the Index to the twelfth hour of the Cycle then let both the Globe and the Quadrant be moved till the place of the Sun agree with the noted degree of the Quadrant for so the Sun shall have the same Altitude above the Horizon of this place as it is in the Meridies of the former The Index will shew the hour demanded in the Cycle therefore this hour and the rayes of the Sun illustrating and beating of the place and Air of the Torrid Zone are as equally elevated over the Horizon of it as the rayes in the Meridies of the former place it thence followeth that the same heat will be in the Torrid Zone at the hour found out as in the place of the Temperate Zone in the Meridies except other causes intercede Some hinderances viz. first that the Sun in the foregoing days hath introduced some one or other calid Constitution to the place and the Air of the Torrid Zone and not such and so great in the places of the Temperate or Frigid Zone Then secondly that the Sun straitly ascending towards the Meridian above the Horizon of the places of the Torrid Zone sendeth forth all his rayes to the place as in one plain and to one plaga and therefore causeth greater heat than in the Temperate or Frigid Zone where the Sun moveth obliquely from the Horizon to the Meridian and sends forth his rayes from one and another plaga therefore the rayes are not contracted into a place so narrow nor do they continually heat For example let us seek in what hour of the day in places being under the very Aequator on the day of the Aequinoctials the Sun will have that Altitude as he hath at Amstelodame on the Meridies of the same day Proposition X. How the causes of light heat and of the seasons which we have reckoned up in the first Proposition of this Chapter have themselves in the Torrid Zone and how to shew them Of the seasont light and heat in the Torrid Zone and how they are shewed First every day of the year ascendeth directly above the Horizon of those places especially of the Aequator towards the Meridian and the Vertex of them and therefore about the ninth hour of Forenoon he heginneth to ejaculate to those places rayes about 40 degrees declining from the perpendicular rayes which rectitude of the rayes or perpendicular of the rayes augmenteth towards the Meridies and again decreasing continueth to the fourth hour after the Meridies or Noonstead where the Sun departing towards the Occidental Horizon beginneth to send forth his rayes more obliquely to those places therefore the greatest heat in those places ought to be from about the ninth hour before Noon even to the third or fourth after Noon if that this cause be only regarded but yet because the Sun now departs from the Vertex of those places and sometimes approacheth nearer therefore the Winter of every one of those places shall be when the Sun goeth from the points of the Ecliptick much remote from those places that is from the first degree of Cancer or Capricorn towards the points having a middle
the Seasons in many places of the Torrid Zone are contrary to the motion of the Sun viz. that it is Summer there when the Sun is most distant and Winter when he is nearest yea vertical to the Vertex Therefore we have distinguished the Seasons into Celestial and Terrestrial We have shewed heretofore and that in the third and fourth Proposition how any place being given in that Torrid Zone the Months of the year are to be found in which the place ought to have Summer Spring Autumn and Winter if we have regard to the access and recess of the Sun that is we have taught to design the times of the Celestial Seasons But seeing that in many places of this Zone the forementioned Seasons do not happen in those Months but in others and that in divers places in a different time therefore the times of the Terrestrial seasons must be taken not from the Heaven or a certain method but from the experience made in those places and as much as possible the cause of every one of them why they repugn the Celestial cause must be explicated viz. from those 10 causes which we have laid down in the first Proposition ãâã this therefore ought first to be known that the Winter in the Torrid Zone doth rage with cold and frost but rather with raines and is to be defined by a lesser heat then that in the time of the Summer Farther in many places of the Torrid Zone they reckon not four but two seasons of the year viz. Summer and Winter and these are not distinguished by heat and cold but chiefly by siccity and humidiy for in the Winter they have often greater heat than in their Summer with a shortness of respiration because the rain and the Clouds press the Calid Air downwards But the Spring and Autumn are not to be found by so manifest signs or differences We shall begin our Narration from that part of Africa which lyeth under the Torrid Zone and proceeding towards the East with Brazilia we shall finish the whole Torrid Zone seated in the West measured by us The Regions of the Occidental shore of Africa from the Tropick of Cancer to Cape verd that is distant 14 degrees from the Aequator towards the North are all abounding both with Corn and variety of Fruit there are also heards of Cattell and flocks of Sheep in great abundance The Inhabitants are of a great strength the heat of the Air a little exceedeth Mediocrity so that the Inhabitants go naked except the Noble and those that are rich whose clothing is a Linnen Cloth The cause of this fertility and temperate Air contrary to the custom of the Torrid Zone is First many Rivers of which the chief are Senega and Gambea before they discharge themselves into the neighbouring Sea they water those Regions and render the Air more humid and frigid Secondly the vicinity of the Sea which affordeth humid vapours and somewhat cold Winds How the Seasons of the year have themselves in this place and what months of the year Summer and Winter happen and are vigorous I have not found noted by Writers which is to be imputed to their negligence and sloth Yet in one Itinerary I have read that in one of the Islands which lye not far from the Promontary of Cape verd by name Salinae or the Hesperides in one of them I say called St. Vincents the Latitude is 16 degrees the watery months that is Winter are August September November December January even to February This time almost agreeth with the Celestial cause for in the months of May June and July because the Sun is very near or else vertical to that place therefore it maketh the Celestial Summer and here the Terrestrial agreeth with it for then they have a greater heat and dry Air without Rain In the months of February March and April is their Spring be-because the Sun is moved from a moderate distance to a lesser therefore they are then without rains and have a moderate heat The months of August September and October are to be ascribed to Autumn by reason of the rains although it ought to begin latter because the Sun in August hath not yet returned from his least distance to his mean Lastly the months November December and January are Winter because the Sun hath then the greatest distance from their Vertex and then they find more and longer continuing rains with some cold but this is not to be observed every year though most years But how the seasons are in the Continent of Africa is not related except that concerning the shore of Sierra Leon it is contrary as we shall now speak 2. Now succed the Regions of the Coast of Africa which look towards the South and extend themselves from the Promontory of Cape Verd to the curvature or bending part of Africa that is from the West to East These Regions are termed by one name Guiny although others attribute this term only to one part Now they lie in the Torrid Northern Zone 3.4 and more degrees from the Aequator In these Regions there is a continual heat of the Air without any intervening Cold yet they attribute some months to the Summer and some to the Winter I think the same must be understood of the former Western Coast for in the Regions of the Shore called Sierra Leon which is removed above 9 degrees from the Aequator towards the North as also in many Tracts of Guiny they ascribe the months March April May June and July to Winter especially the three first by reason that on these months there fall frequent and almost continual rains hot or warm great Thunders and Lightnings and so great Storms rage without violent Winds that none can easily conceive them See Chap. 21. who hath not had experience of them How they rage I have already spoken also in these months the Fields lie Barren but when these Stormy months are expired then they dig up the dry Earth which hath sucked up the great Rains in the said wet months and mix stamped and bruised Coals instead of manuring and so for the space of 10 days suffer the Earth to putrify and then they sow their Seed There is here so great an heat of the Air joyned with humidity by reason of the propinquity of the Sea that the Fish which are taken stink if kept undressed half a day Therefore in these places the Winter shall be in April May and June when the Storms and Rains rage The Spring in July August and September the Summer in October November and December and the Autumn in January February and March where the Rains and Storms do begin Now all these times of the Seasons in those places are contrary to the Celestial cause or motion of the Sun for in the months of May June and July great heat ought to be there because then the Sun is then vertical or near the Vertex which the heat or warmness of the Rain also
testifyeth contrariwise in the months of October November and December it should be Winter because that the Sun being about the beginning and Tropick of Capricorn is most remote from the Vertex of those places Here therefore the time of the Terrestrial season do much differ from the Celestial seasons The cause therefore of these Rains Storms and Thunders at that time in those places when the Sun is so near is not easy to be explicated But it seems to be that the Sun in the day time forceth up many Vapours from the Sea and Sulphureous exhalations from the Land of Guiny which vapours being condensed by the cool of the Night cause the Rains especially when no continual wind bloweth in these places which may discuss the Vapours But for the most part here is a calm some Storms excepted And these months of Rain which they attribute to Winter are not cold but hot because no wind bloweth and the Sun is Vertical yea the heat is Suffocative which is the cause of shortness of respiration to the Inhabitants And although the Fields be Barren of Grain in these Watery months yet the Trees and Bushes are in their Verdure all the year and bear Fruit. The Day is here equal to the Night almost throughout the whole year the Sun in the East rising at six in the Morning and sets in the West at six in the Evening but the Easterly or Westerly Sun is seldom conspicuous there because for the most part he ariseth involved with Clouds for half an hour and half an hour before he setteth he is again inveloped with Clouds That also deserveth consideration why in the Months of July and August the same Rains and Storms rage not there seeing that the Sun is then as equally nigh to those places as in the months of May and June Moreover why in the Islands of the Hesperides which are not so far removed from Sierra Leon and Guiny the VVinter falleth out in contrary months 3. How the times of the seasons are in the Interiour or Mediterranean part of Africa which is included in the Arch of the Tropick of Cancer the Regions of the Occidental Shore and Guiny or the Land of the Negros concerning which I have found nothing as yet noted but that all those places are almost Steril except those adjacent to the River Niger for that River every year in the months of June July and August overfloweth and communicateth much fertility to those Lands and moreover formeth many Lakes The other places confining on Lybia are infested with violent heat being for the most part Sandy The Watery Months do not seem to bear sway here after the same mode as in Guiny 4. Now follow the Regions of the Coast of the Tongue of Africa which is stretched from the North towards the South and regardeth the West The Regions are Manicongo Angola and the like from the second degree of Nothern Latitude even to the Tropick South of Capricorn beyond the Aequator Now the Kingdom of Congo beginneth from the second degree of South Latitude The Winter in these places is like the constitution of the Vernal season in the Territory of Rome in Italy the heat temperate so that they alter their Garments in no time of the year Neither are the tops of the adjacent Mountains infested with cold Here almost with our Spring the Watery Winter beginneth and continueth April May June July August and good part of September At that time the Summer beginneth which possesseth the other Months even to the 10 of March even in this Summer they have no rains or at least very little and seldom have a continual serenity But in the Watery Months the Sun is scarce to be seen on any day perpetual Clouds and rain so obstructing the Air also frequent Travados or Storms It doth not rain whole days but for the most part hours before and two hours after noon great drops fall which are soon received by the droughty Earth Therefore although the Inhabitants divide the year only into two parts it may be distributed into four our common people also do usually divide the year into Summer and Winter because the Spring is comprised in the Summer and the Autumn in the Winter These times of the Terrestrial seasons in these places almost agree with the Celestial course for from the 25 of March April May June July August to the 25 of September the Sun departs from those places to the Tropick of Cancer where he is most remote from them the 21 of June and the rest of the time he approacheth again to them so that on the 30 of September he becometh vertical to them and goeth to a moderate distance towards the Tropick of Capricorn and returneth from thence in the months of October November December January and February so that in March he again becometh vertical therefore in those Months they have a Summer by reason of the vicinity of the Sun whose effects are not here hindred by a Terestrial cause And then again in the Months from the 10th of March to the 10th of September they have Winter because then the Sun is more removed from them but the times of the Spring Autumn Summer and Winter which we have assigned do not well agree with the Celestial course and I doubt whether the Summer and VVinter may be distinguished into the Spring and Autumn in those places Therefore here a more easy cause may be rendred why in those Months from the 10 of March to the 10 of September they should have a quotidian Rain and some kind of VVinter viz. because the Sun departs from their vertex towards the place of the greatest distance but this cause is not only sufficient because it is not able of its self to produce such an effect but another must be added The tops of the Mountains which lie not far from these Maritime places towards the east are discerned in those watery Months to be continually covered with Snow The Wind is the North-west Wind. and this is caused by reason of the fixed wind which in these Months there bloweth therefore the Sun elevateth the Vapours very much from the Sea And this fixed Wind forceth them towards the tops of the Mountains where they are condensed and then turn to Rain and from the Rain which falleth from the Mountains springeth the inundation of the Nile and other Rivers of Africa Moreover we must know that in these watery Months the Rivers of Congo overflow the adjacent Fields which causeth great Fertility in them and also disgorgeth great quantities of water into the Sea 5. In the Maritime Region Lowango adjacent to Congo there are also observed to be Rainy Months and other Months of Summer that are serene but that which is to be admired is that they are not the same with those in which we said the Rain doth wax vigorous in the Months of January February March and April when yet it is Summer and a serene Aire in January and
February in Congo Here therefore the Terrestrial Season is repugnant to the Celestial because that in January and February the Sun is not most remote from those places and therefore they should not have Rain but rather Siccity Without doubt the cause is either from another scituation of the Mountains another fixed Wind or the like 6. The Island of St. Thomas See the Description of St. Thomas and Anobon are very abundant in Sugar Grain Fruits and Meats and great plenty of Oranges c. 7. How the Seasons are in the other Regions of the Occidental Coasts of Africa from Lowango to the Tropick of Capricorn I have not yet found to be observed by any one 8. Therefore that shore being left and the Promontory of Good-hope being sayled about we return to the Tropick of Capricorn where the Oriental Coast of the Promontory or Tongue of Africa is discovered in which lyeth Zofala Mozambique Quiloa even to the Aequator which are illustrated by the Oriental Sun In these places the Winter is in the Months of September November December and January in the rest Siccity and Summer which time is contrary to that in which in Congo we have said that they have the Rain in Winter and yet these Regions lye from the Aequator but the ridge of Mountains which doubly divide this Prominent Tongue of Africa into the Eastern and Western Land questionless are the cause of this diversity The Land of these Regions are only of a moderate Fertility in many places Sandy Barren and scorched with the chalure of the Sun but the Rivers the adjacent Sea and general Easternly Wind much allay the heat 9. The other Regions of the Oriental Coasts of Africa lying from the Aequator towards the North at the mouth of the Arabian Gulph and hence to the Shore of the said Gulph even to the Tropick of Cancer these Regions I say what seasons they have and in what times of the year I have not yet found observed by any but that some write that this tract is barren sandy oppressed with such a violent heat and destitute of Rivers 10. As to the seasons in the Mediteranean part of Africa which is the Region of the Abyssines which is cut almost in the middle by the Aequator so that it hath some Provinces in the Southern Torrid Zone and very many in the Northern Torrid Zone 11. Now leaving Africa we enter the Regions of Asia lying under the Torrid Zone where first we meet with the Regions of Arabia adjacent to the Red Sea from Mecca to Aden 12 degrees from the Aequator towards the North which regard the West The Merchants at Aden negoriate their affairs in the Night season by reason of heat in the day on the East they have the Arabian Mountains These Regions are exceedingly infested with heat in March and April and more in the following Months whilst the Sun approacheth to their Vertex and about it it remaineth May June July and August the chalure is so great that the Inhabitants especially the better sort cause water to be poured on their Bodies all the day long or else lie in Vessels of Water to refresh them I suppose the cause to be the defect of watery Vapours because on the Oriental part the Region is Rocky and hath but few Rivers now the Oriental wind which is general although it be not there perceived repelleth the Vapours rising from the Red Sea Likewise the abundance of Sand which retaineth the heat received in the night and communicateth it to the Air. Therefore this time of the Summer and Winter agrees with the Celestial Course 12. The same is the case of all Arabia and its Eastern Coast 13. In Camboja in India lying under the Tropick of Cancer as also in the Regions of Malabar or the Eastern Coast of the Indies which regard the West and extend themselves from the North towards the South to the eighth degree of North Latitude I say these Regions the Winter or rainy Seasons possess the Months of June July August and September but especially from the middle of June to the middle of September Neither in all these places doth it rain in an equal time but more continually in the province of Goana and Cocina and less in Camboja where it only raineth three Months in the other eight months it seldome raineth in Camboja but in Goa in the Months of April and May it raineth but less vehement and beginning with Thunder and Storms so that to Autumn here may be ascribed half the Month of March also April and May to the 15th of June then from the 15th of June July and August to Winter likewise from the 15th of September to December the Spring the other Months from the 15th of December to the 15th of March to Summer The Winter is not so called from the cold as with us but from the Rains which then fall for in these Months is great drought because that the Water of the former Rains is extracted by the Sun from the Earth Yet the Inhabitants do not number four Seasons but only two Summer and Winter or rather a dry and a rainy Season Besides these Raines there are frequent Storms on the Coast and also Thunders in those rainy Months so that the Sea is supposed to be then shut up and many Rivers then overflow the Sea is open again in the Month of September and then Ships put forth to Sea from the Coast of Malabar into various parts of the world Neither are there any violent rains in these places in the Fields except some Storms by reason that it ceaseth for many hours of the day therefore it affordeth the Inhabitants a time of Planting and Sowing which they do in these watery Months The Air also is of a moderate heat at that time because the Sun is obstructed with Clouds so that the remote Inhabitants expatiate from the Shore to the Hills and Fields for recreation where the inundation is not great and incredible fertility is acquired to the Earth by this Rain But if these Raines fall not on the year as in Anno 1630. which seldom happens then all hope of Sowing and consequently Harvest is taken away thence cometh Scarcity of Corn a hot Sultery Air burning Feavours Pestilences and Deaths of Thousands of People In the said year 1630 A great Famine in Camboja in 1630. and the year following Mans Flesh was publickly sold in the Shambles in Camboja Sometimes the Shores do so rage that the Houses which are but slightly built fall by the inundation of the River They Sow in May and the beginning of June and Reap in November and December it is otherwise in Guiny This Summer and this Winter is contrary to the Celestial Course or Motion of the Sun for in the Months of July and August the Sun is vertical to those places or very near the Vertex therefore they must have heat and drought this is the great felicity of those places
for if these Rains fall not and the Clouds obscured not the Sun that great heat of the Sun would render the ground Sandy and Steril as Lybia and Arabia where these Rains are not the Sun being near the Vertex Contrary wise in the Months of December January and February they should have Winter or lesser heat because that then the Sun is most remote from them and then they have Summer Yet in the night the Air is cold enough moreover a continual Wind from the 12th hour of the day to the 12th hour of the night bloweth from the Sea which is very acceptable 14. In the Coast of the East Indies which is called Choromandel the seasons also differ from the Heavens for in the Months of March April May and June the Sun causeth vehement heat and there is no rain Now the People which for the most part are Saracens divide the year into the hot the wet and the Cold seasons the hot or Summer as I have said is in the months of March April May and June but the intollerable heat is from the middle of May to the middle of June the Wind blowing from the North unto which if you turn your face you shall discover so great a heat of the Air as if you drew nigh an Oven for the Sun then in that Plaga is in the Meridies also the Wood and Stones contract a great heat yet the Waters in the Wells is so cold that many drinking thereof for extream heat dye The greatest heat of the day is between Nine in the Forenoon and Three in the Afternoon in these intermedial hours they rest from travelling the other hours before Nine in the Morning and Three in the Afternoon the Air is at least tolerably temperate serene and acceptable the Heaven delightful and travelling pleasant The VVet season taketh up four months July August September and October The Cold season November December January and February in December and January the Cold is sensible enough especially in the night Here are many things which deserve our enquiry for in the months of March April May and June the Sun cometh to those places of the Coast of Choromandel and becometh Vertical to them therefore it is no wonder if they have great heat but why have they not the same heat in July and August feeing he is equally as near them in those months and by reason of the former heat it should be more hot Moreover why do the seasons of the Coast of Choromandel differ from the seasons of the Coast of Malabar seeing that they both lie in the same Climate and have the Sun Vertical on the same days and on the same remote And that which is more to be wondered at there interceedeth between these two Regions in some places 70 in others only 20 miles interval so that you may come into a place of a serene and servid Air where the Winter predominateth and that in the space of one day Masseus thus speaketh of these places In these Regions saith he amongst other admirable things that above others exceedeth the reach of all Philosophers that in the same Plaga of the Heavens in the equal access and recess of the Sun in the same months of the year from the Sun rising beyond the Mountain of Gatis which by a direct excursion to the Promontory of Cori intersects the whole Region of Malabar there is Summer and drought and from the West on this side Gatis there are Rains and Winter that in so near a propinquity of places in respect of the course of the seasons the same People almost seem Antipodes one to another But not only in these but also in others we have shewed this diversity to be found and shall shew more anon The cause is the scituation of the Mountains which determinate the Land of Choromandel from Malabar proceeding from the North towards the South To this must be added divers Winds for on the Coast of Choromandel a general Eastern Wind is more discovered except in the Summer months of May and June which driveth the vapours towards the tops of the Mountains whence it raineth in the Land of Malabar These Mountains tops are discovered to be continually covered with Clouds in the Pluvial months also more vehement Showrs in those where the rain is in Malabar But when it raineth in the Region of Choromandel then is there a serenity in the tops of the Mountains as in the Land of Malabar except the months July and August for in these it raineth in both Lands 15. In the Regions of the Gangick Sea opposite to the Coast of Chroromandel and in the Northern Torrid Zone as Sian Peru the Chersonesus of Malacca the Pluvial months in which the Rivers overslow are September October and November But in the Land of Malacca it raineth every week of the year twice or thrice except the months of January February and March in which there is a continual drought All these are contrary to the Celestial course and their causes must be sought from the Mountains Winds the propinquity of the Sea and the like But because as yet we have no accurate observations concerning these Regions we will not search them here The chief cause of the Fertility of these Regions is the overflowing of the Rivers The vapours of the adjacent Sea the Rivers and the Winds do much allay the heat whence the Inhabitants have great plenty of Fruits In the Kingdom of Patana and those bordering on it the Summer beginneth in February and continueth to the end of October in which time there is a continual heat which is allayd with a continual Oriental Wind the Air wholsom In November December and January there are continual Rains which yet do not hinder a new increase every month at the least The same must be understoood of Camboja And this Winter agreeth with the Celestial course 16. Leaving Asia the Pacifick Sea being Sayled over we enter that part of America which lieth under the Torrid Zone which is twofold South and North the South again is twofold Peru and Brazilia although the parts of Peru be vicine yet they have contrary Seasons in one and the same time for the Region of Peru is divided into three parts the Shoar or Maritim part the Mountainous and the Plain part which he in the same Climate In the Mountainous places they have a Plavial Winter from the month of October to the end of March when they should have Summer by the vicinity of the Sun They have Summer from the entrance of April to October in which months no Rains do fall but in the Winter months there are continual Rains Therefore the Terrestrial seasons differ here from the Celestial In Maritim Peru there is almost no Winter in the whole year but they account their Winter from the month of April to October which agreeth with the Celestial cause because the Sun is then removed from them to the Tropick of Cancer and thence returneth by reason
the Brazilians in the months of October and February and striketh the Earth with reflex raies at most acute Angles Which diversity of these Regions promiseth the Inhabitants perpetual health by reason of the often calms and the Air quelling all noxious heats Hence it is easy to dollect that the seasons of the year do not so much depend immediately on the Sun and his motion as on the species of the Winds the diversity of aspects of the Stars the quality and peculiar scituation of the Region Moreover in these Mediterranean Regions towards the West the nights are more cold than in the Maritim so much some times that the Frost seizeth on the very hairs of the Peoples In the same months from the East about the Ocean is Summer and Siccity No Islands are opposite to Brazilia from the West beyond the ridges of the Mountains and the Marshes of Brazilia is the Winter Fogs and Rain Oftentimes the Heavens may be seen covered with vast Clouds from the East towards the West but those again very thin except in the days of the Rain the Sun both rising and setting may be beheld with fixed eyes for there is a wonderful serenity on every side especially towards the evening which never afordeth any Vapours or Clouds to the succeeding Moon but renders the night so clear that the old and new Moon may be seen in one and the same day and letters may be well read it the quarter Moon The Aether in respect of the diversity of the Planets other inseriour causes acceding receiveth its distemperature for the Heaven about evening is bright with Lightning without Thunder in the most dry and serene season The drops of Rain are very great and fall with great violence which is wont to be preceeded by a suffocative warmness The Dew here is more fruitful than that of Europe being impregnated with much Winter and therefore is more penetrating and thin especially in Summer which is manifest in all Mettals and in Iron especially which it easily eateth up without the assistance of any Clouds The Meadows and open Fields do less wax green in the Summer but more especially in the Pluvial months although the Earth then seemed somewhat more sad to the Inhabitants and the places unfit for Tillage afford Pasture See Piso All the Lands of Brazilia arise into moderate and pleasant Hills there are no Mountains of any great hight in the Coasts but yet some are discovered afar off in the Solitudes among the barren hills yet not every where but with some intervals of Miles the Valleys are interposed every one irrigated with some small Rivers and for that reason are not only fertil in the pluvial months but also in those of the Summer The Hills in the Summer months are steril by reason of the heat of the Sun so that they wither and Grass doth not only die on them but sometimes the Trees also It very seldom raineth throughout the whole day and night and for some continual days very seldom without intermission the Pluvial months do a little differ In the year 1640. as Marriners have observed there were 7 Pluvial months viz February March April May June July and August But most and almost continually from April May and June In the year 1642. the most Pluvial months six viz. March April May June July and August But the account of the other years was not much different Now these observations are to be taken only for one place and not for all the places in Brazilia Hence it is manifest that the Summer and Winter of Brazilia answereth to the Celestial account seeing that in the greatest distance of the Sun they have Rain and in the least and moderate towards the South they have heat Yet there are not a few irregularities the cause of which are to be sought from the scituation of the Winds and Earth The six rainy months are May June July August September and October 18. This is enough for the Southern America in the Northern it is otherwise For in the Province of Nicaragua it raineth for six months and the other six months it is Summer and dry weather so that passengers may travel in the night This now is contrary to the Celestial course for in the wet months for in May June and so on to November the Sun is vertical or near the Vertex unto these places so that then they should have Summer and Siccity and not Rain In November and December it is very distant therefore they should there have Rain Thus have we declared the Seasons of the chief places of the whole Torrid Zone from which being compared one with another we collect 1. That in some places the cold is scarse sensible in some part of the year and therefore the Winter is rather to be defined by the Rains than by cold in those places 2. In some places the cold is sufficiently sensible 3. In the night time especially in the last quarter the Air is discovered to be very cold by reason of the depression of the Sun beneath the Horizon 4. That it is not the least cause of the tolerable heat and that those Regions are inhabited viz. that no days are there long but almost equal to the night for if the days were as long there the Sun remaining above the Horizon as in the places of the Temperate and Frigid Zones then doubtless they would be uninhabited 5. That the Winds do much diminish the heat of the Sun 6. That places which ly in one and the same Climate have the Summer and Winter in divers times although they be very near to one another 7. That those places which have Siccity and Humidity contrary to the access and recess of the Sun are so scituated that on the East they have Ridges of Mountains and that they regard the West Peru excepted 8. That the Seasons observe no certain rule in the places of the Torrid Zone 9. That although most of the Inhabitants divide the year into two Seasons which is likewise observed by many Writers to wit a Pluvial and Dry Season yet it may aptly be divided into four so that they may not only have a Summer and a Winter but also a Spring and an Autumn For as in our parts the Spring approacheth near the nature of Summer and the Autumn of Winter so also the dry places of the Torrid Zone may be divided 10. And lastly in some places there is a continual Harvest in some only in two parts of the year and in others only in one part of the year Proposition XII To shew how the four Seasons of the year are made c. in the places of the Temperate Zones Of the seasons of the year in places lying in the Temperate Zones 1. In these places that cause which we have placed in the first place amongst the causes of the Seasons in the first Proposition of this Chapter is so potent in respect of the other causes that that
are under the 52 degree of South Latitude yet they have no very hot Summer So that the Hollanders in the month of January when there should be an hot Summer found a great glade of Ice in the Creek of one of their Seas In the Mountains of the adjacent Coasts Snow is discovered all the Summer long and it is observed that in almost all the Regions of the South Temperate Zone they have a Cold far more intense in Winter and a violency of Rain and a less heat in Summer than the parts of our Northern Temperate Zone Whether this be the cause that the Sun makes a longer stay and the slower progress in the Semicircle of the Northern Zodiac than in the Southern is to be questioned In the Neighbouring Province of Peru which they call La Valla Imperial in the Province of Potosi they find so great a Cold that for four miles circumference there groweth nothing The season of Chili In the Kingdom of Chili which extendeth it self from 30 degrees of South Latitude to 50 degrees the Spring beginneth in the months of August sooner than the Celestial Account admitteth and endeth in the middle of November And from the middle of November Summer beginneth even to the middle of February from whence Autumn leadeth on to the middle of May which the Winter succedeth which is very violent and dispoileth the Trees of their Blossoms and scattereth a deep Snow with a vehement Frost which yet is discovered by the Sun except which is very seldom that the Sun appeareth not but the Snow rarely falleth in the Vallies for although it falls in great abundance and is heaped up so high that it ascends the tops of Mountains and is heaped together in the vacuity of the Mountains as in so many wells and indure almost the whole year yet being there dissolved they flow into the Rivers and Torrents which run through the Vallies with a great force even to the Sea to the great enrichment of the Grounds But although here it Snow not except rarely in the Plains yet it maketh so excessive a Frost that the like is scarcely felt in many parts of Europe which happeneth partly from the Altitude of the Pole partly from the propinquity of the Mountains from which descend so subtile and penetrating Winds that sometimes they are unsufferable whence it cometh to pass that the Maritim parts are more temperate He that is Studious may collect other differences of Region under the same Climate or in the vicine Climates from Writers for example that in England the Air is not so cold as in Holland so that they pen not up their Heards in the Winter Betwen Siberia and Tartaria in a place seated not far from the Frigid Zone in the end of our Temperate are said to be plesant Fields and rich Pastures almost no cold seeing that they scarce feel Winter where by the command of the Duke of Moscovia the City Tooru is built which is at this day so much encreased that it is able to repell the Assaults of the Tartars The Island of Japan In Japan the Winter is Cold Snowy Ruiny when yet other Regions of Europe and Asia lying under the same Climate have far lesser Winter the cause is because that Japan consists of many Islands disjoyned by a small Euripus and that it also lyeth in the middle of the Ocean America very hot in the Summer In Armenia and the adjoyning places there is great heat in Summer because it lieth amongst Mountains here and there mixed with Fields hence the more rich in some places in Summer remove to the tops of the Mountains and remain there for some months but the meaner sort in the day time defend themselves in the Mountains from the near and about eventide do descend to the lower ground Proposition XIII To declare how in places in the Frigid Zone the four Seasons of the year have themselves with the light Of the places in the Frigid Zone The cause of those Seasons with the light proposed in the entrance of this Chapter thus stands in the Frigid Zone 1. The Center of the Sun for some days or months as the place is either nearer or remote from the Pole doth not arise above the Horizon and for so many days setteth not 2. In those days when he is above the Horizon he only illustrateth those places with his oblique raies because he is not much elevated above the Horizon but moveth round it because those places are over much removed from the way of the Sun 3. The Sun is not deeply depressed beneath the Horizon yea in places near the Polary Circle or Artick Pole although the Center of the Sun doth not arise yet part of his Skirt ariseth and is beheld for some days above the Horizon before the Center it self ariseth by reason that the half Sun possesseth 15 minutes in the Heaven For example let us take those places whose distance is from the Aequator 67 degrees towards the Pole Artick let the Pole be elevated according to this Latitude and in the Meridian Crena of the Horizon you shall see that the degrees of the Ecliptick do not arise from the 19th degree of Sagittarius to the 11 of Capricorn that is the Center of the Sun being in that Arch doth not arise for 24 days viz. from the 10th of December to the 4th of January and yet part of the Skirt of the Sun for that whole time shall be above the Horizon to wit on the 21 of December the Limbus glittereth the Horizon but on the 10 of December as also on the first of January half the Sun shall be above the Horizon and half beneath because the Center is then in the Horizon But the whole Sun shall be elevated above the Horizon when the Center of the Sun shall hold the 14 degree of Capricorn that is about the 4 day of January also the whole shall afterwards appear when his Center shall possess the 16 degree of Sagittarius that is about the 7 of December But in places where the elevation of the Pole is 70 or 75 degrees there this difference between the Oriental Limbus and the Oriental Center is very little so that the Limbus or Skirt scarcely anticipateth the rise of the Center of the Sun one day or half a day From this smallest of depression it followeth also that they enjoy the light of the Crepusculum many hours before the rising and after the setting of the Sun and although the Sun ariseth not yet in all or many of the hours of the day they have light in the Air. There is also another cause See Chap. 19. which maketh the Sun first to be seen before that he is elevated above the Horizon For thence it cometh to pass that not only the Sun is seen before he is elevated above the Horizon and before the Raies can directly come from him to the Eye but also that the light of the Twilight sooner illustrateth
the Air than it would do without this refraction We shall anon alledge an example of the appearancy of the Sun proceeding from refraction 4. The Full Moon and near the Full remaineth above the Horizon for many days when the Sun is depressed beneath it viz. for so many more days by how much that place is more near the Pole Yet it is not so highly elevated above the Horizon as to cause any warmness But the Full Moon in those months in which the Sun remaineth above the Horizon in an whole revolution the Full Moon is never above the Horizon The Planets not always the same above Horizon 5. The Fixed Stars are almost the same always above the Horizon but not the Planets For Saturn remaineth 15 years above the Horizon of the place near the Pole and 15 beneath the same Jupiter 6 years beneath and 6 above the same Horizon Mars 1 year Venus and Mercury about half a year From this cause it is likely that there is great diversity of the motions of the Air and seasons in divers years 6. The Land in most places of the Frigid Zone is Stony Rocky and as hard as Flint in few places Chalky Sulphureous and Fat In these places there is a moderate fertility in the other a sterility 7. Those Regions are incompassed with the Sea but for the Mediterranian we as yet have no certain account 8. Some of the Regions of the Frigid Zone have Mountains of a moderate hight but most want them running on a plain for a long space 9. The cold Winds there frequently blow from the Polary Plaga seldom the East Wind and least of all the West In the cold Artick Plaga the North Winds rage in the Antartick the South 10. Clouds and Rains frequently perplex these Regions From these causes it is not difficult to collect what the condition of the seasons in these Regions are for in the Winter time when the Sun riseth not for whole daies it cannot otherwise be but that for the most part thick Clouds Frost and Cold must render the Land uninhabitable They are not altogether deprived of light for that time for the Moon being above the Horizon for a long time giveth light and the twilight is daily afforded from the Sun to the Vicine Horizon But the Snow the stick close about the Earth which cannot be discussed by the heat of the Sun and therefore hinder the aspect of remote things There is no fertility but all barren and uncultivated for that which some suppose by how much any Region is nearer to the Pole by so much less it feeleth the intenseness of the cold and the Fields are found more fertil seemeth not probable to me when neither in Nova Zembla which is distant 16 degrees from the Pole nor in Spitzbirga which is only 8 degrees distant such a constitution of the Earth is found but a roughness and hardness and almost in the middle of Summer Snows or at least Showers and very cold Winds Neither is their opinion helped by one example observed by Mariners in a certain Region 9 degrees distant from the Pole which most men suppose to be Groenland For in this green Grass is found and an Air more warm than in Nova Zembla as is most certain The only Animals peculiar to these Northern Regions Rhinoceros a kind of Venison is the Rhinoceros and this in the space of a month becometh exceeding fat by feeding on this grass Nevertheless seeing that as yet not many Regions are hitherto found of this temperature in the Frigid Zone it is not expedient for us from this single example to make a general conjecture especially seeing that the cause of this peculiar constitution is manifest for that Land is full of Marshes and Sedgey and the grass by which the Rhinoceros or Dear are tendred so fat is not a kind of Terrestrial Grass but Sedge and Osiers but other Herbs are not there found or any Trees From whence we may gather that that Land containeth some fat and Sulphureous Substance which being mixed which the water produceth such an Oyle and fattening Sedge but that the like Earth is to be found in other parts of the Frigid Zone hath not as yet been observed but rather the contrary Therefore in the Winter in these places is little light but an incredible and great violence of Cold Snow Showers and Polary Winds And this Winter beginneth in the Northern Frigid Zone when the Sun first entreth Capricorn although also the Autumn the Sun going from the 1 degree of Libra to the 1 of Capricorn be little different from this violent Winter The Spring indeed is less infested with this violence of the Air yet it is without Snows Showers and cold Polary Winds Yet the increase of heat in the day or rather the decrease of cold is discovered at that time viz. the Sun going from the 1 degree of Aries to the 1 of Cancer And in this Vernal season or in the latter days of it the Sun continueth above the Horizon in intire revolutions and therefore then there is discovered a moderate heat which yet is not of that force as to melt and dissolve the Snow of all those places into Water much less is it able to melt the Ice whence Marriners report that here is to be found Snow and Ice of a perpetual duration Then the Summer shall be from the going of the Sun from the 1 degree of Cancer to the 1 of Libra in the first part of which the Sun yet remaineth for whole daies above the Horizon and augmenteth the heat by some accession so that June July and August are months of a tolerable Air. In some places among the Mountains the heat of the Sun is intense but the Showers and Clouds do much hinder this benignity of the Sun and especially the most sharp Northern Winds unto which sometimes Snow is adjoyned so that no fruits or Corn can here arrive to any maturity except in some places near the Artick Circle CHAP. XXVII Of the Shadows which the bodies erected in the Earth and illuminated by the Sun do cast and of the division of the Earth arising from thence SEeing that the Shadows in divers places of the Earth which the illuminated bodies of the Sun do cast are carryed into divers places and falling on the Sense have much variety hence it came to pass that men who were ignorant of this cause were struck with an admiration and in respect of the Shadows of the Earth divided the Inhabitants of the Earth as it were into three sorts which division must be applyed to the places of the Earth or to its Superficies So that they termed some Amphiscij others Heteroscij and the rest Periscij The explication of which terms seeing that they contain but small learning we shall say somewhat also concerning Shadows which although they do not pertain to Geography yet by reason of their near affinity they may be proposed in this Chapter Of
the Moon from the Earth in her Full is 64 Semidiamiters of the Earth Therefore N L shall be 11 15 and the proportion shall be made thus as 64 is to a 11 15 so is 10000000 to 114583 which is the Sign 39 Minutes Therefore the Arch H L is less than 90 Deg. 39 Minutes and therefore 89 Deg. 21. Minutes Therefore in the place to which the Moon is Vertical constituted in the Vertex of the Horizon the People to whom the Moon then riseth and setteth shall not be those which are beheld in the very Horizon but those in the Parallel of the Horizon distant from it 39 Minutes Proposition XX. The Declination of any Star being given to exhibit all the places on the Terrestrial Globe unto which that Star is Vertical in his Diurnal Circumvolution Of the Declination of Stars Let the Degrees of the given Declination of the Aequator be numbred on the Brazen Meridian and in the term of the Numeration make a sign with a Chalk or let a Parallel be noted on the Globe by a Chalk applyed and the Globe turned round all the places scituated in this Parallel are those which pass through the noted Point of the Meridian the Vertex of which that Star in every Diurnal Circumvolution shal possess for some moment of time Proposition XXI The direct Ascension of any Star being given and the hour of the given day being given to shew all those places on the Terrestrial Globe on whose Meridian the Star is at the given hour Concerning the Ascension of any Star Let the Degrees given of the right Ascension of the Star be numbred in the Aequator and let a mark be made with Chalk Let also the place of the Sun found from the given day be brought to the Meridian and let the Degrees of the Aequator in the Meridian be noted Let the Arch of the Aequator intercepted between these two noted Points be observed or which is the same let it be changed into hours or scruples of hours for they shew the time which intercedeth between the Appulse of the Sun and that Star at any Meridian This done let the places be found in whose Meridian the Sun is at the given hour or scruple of an hour and the Index being placed at 12 let the Globe be turned until the Index shew the hour before noted or until the noted Degrees of the Aequator have passed the Meridian In this scituation of the Globe all those places which are discovered subject to the Meridian are those sought for to wit those in whose Meridian the Star is at the given time Proposition XXII The right Declination and Ascension of a Star being given and any time of the day being given to exhibit on the Globe first that place to which the Star is then Vertical Secondly all those places above whose Horizons the Star then shall be and those beneath whose Horizons the same shall then be also those in whose Meridian it shall be at the Meridies and in whose Meridian it shall be at midnight also in all those places in which the Star shall then arise and all those im which it shall then set From the direct Ascension let the places be found in whose Meridian the Star is at the time given and those may remain subject to the Brazen Meridian Then let the Degrees of the given Declination from the Aequator towards the Pole be numbred and the Point of the Globe which is subject to the term of the Numeration be noted For this is the place unto which the Star shall be Vertical at the time Let it be placed in the Vertex of the Horizon the Pole being Elevated for Latitude so those places which are subject to the Superiour Semicircle of the Meridian shall have that Star at the given time in the Meridian of the Meridies But those places which are beheld in the Inseriour Semicircle of the Meridian shall have it in the Meridian of Midnight and those places which are beheld in the Oriental Semicircle of the Horizon are those to which the Star setteth at once at that time but to those which lie in the Occidental Semicircle of the Horizon the Star then ariseth together Proposition XXIII To exhibit on the Terrestrial Globe all those places in which the Sun Moon and all the Stars for so long time are obscured beneath the Horizon as they remain to us or any other given place above the Horizon Let our place or any other given place be brought to the Meridian and let the Parallel of the Antaeci be found all the places scituated in this Parallel are these sought for as may be shewed on the Globe if that the Pole be Elevated for the Latitude of the place given and depressed for the Latitude of the Parallel found Proposition XXIV To shew the Cause why the days sooner augment and decrease about the Aequinoxes and more slowly about the Solstices where for many days there seemeth to be no encrease or decrease and that except the Aequator in all the places of the Earth and so much the more by how much they are more removed from the Aequator Concerning the augmenting and decreasing of the days about the Aequinoxes and Solstices For Example Let us take 30 days before the Vernal Aequinox from the 20 of February to the 21 of March and 30 days after the Solstice of Winter or the Solstice of Capricorn from the 21 of December to the 21 of January here the Cause must be shown why the excess of the 21 of March or stay of the Sun above the Horizon above the Longitude of the 20 of February be much greater than the excess of the 21 of January is above the 21 of December Let the place of the Sun for every one of those 4 days be noted on the Ecliptick of the Globe to wit the first Degree of Pisces of Aries Capricorn and Aquarius and let the Parallels of the Sun be described whereof two are extant in the Globe viz. the Aequator and the Tropick of Capricorn Therefore it will be apparent that the Aequator or Parallel of the Sun in the 1 of Aries is absent a far longer interval from the Parallel of the Sun in the 1 of Pisces than the Parallel of the Sun in the 1 of Aquarius from the Parallel in the 1 of Capricorn Thence it cometh to pass that not much a bigger portion of the Parallel of the 1 of Aquarius is above the Horizon than of the Parallel of the 1 of Capricorn or of the Tropick of Capricorn it self Now these parts shew the stay of the Sun above the Horizon in those daies but the portion of the Aequator or Parallel of the 1 of Aries that is above the Horizon is much bigger than the portion of the Parallel of the 1 of Pisces Now because these Arches being above the Horizon denote the stay of the Sun above the Horizon for this is the Longitude of the day hence we
latter or other extension shall be the Longitude of the Globe because it is longer than the former extension as returning into it self and being the Periphery of the whole Circle Others render another cause of the Appellation ãâã that the lesser part of the Earth was known to the Ancients from Pole to Pole the greater from the East to the West Concerning the Latitude and Longitude of the Earth and of places Moreover in the Superficies of the Globe we may take any Semipeniphery for the extension of Latitude and his perpendicular for the extension of Longitude and therefore we may do the same also on the Superficies of the Earth but because it is better for memory if that the Peripheries be assumed whose bounds or selfe those Peripheries before the other Peripheries which have somewhat peculiar in the Superficies therefore in the Superficies of the Earth for the extension of Latitude some one Periphery is deservedly taken drawn amongst the Poles of the Earth and because no other Periphery is perpendicular to this Periphery which may pass together through its Medium except the Line of the Aequator therefore the Aequator it self must be taken for the extension of the Longitude of the Earth So I think it is clearly explained for what reason the Latitude of the Earth between the Poles is measured for Longitude by the assumed Line of the Aequator This Latitude and Longitude of the Earth must not be confounded with the Latitude and Longitude of places or Points in the Earth therefore they are expressed by the same terms because the Latitude of places or Points is taken in the Periphery of the Latitude of the Earth it self and is part of it but the Longitude of places or Points is taken in the Periphery of the Longitude of the Earth viz. in the Aequator it self and its Parallels Yet this is an improper acceptation of the terms because Latitude and Longitude properly as hath been said only agreeth to the Figures and Superficies but a Point hath neither Latitude nor Longitude and therefore this different acceptation of the words Latitude and Longitude ought to be observed because they are so frequently met with in the reading of Geographers viz. the use and acceptation otherwise when we say the Latitude and Longitude of France Spain and the like Because then the words are taken in their proper signification for it is the Figure of France or Spain and so Longitude then signifieth the outmost or longest extension but Latitude the shortest which acceptation doth agree with that wherein we said before that so much Latitude and so much Longitude must be assigned to the Superficies of the Earth But the signification is otherwise when we say the Latitude or Longitude of this place if by places we understand any Point City or Famous Place because then Latitude denoteth the distance of the place from the Aequator and the Longitude its distance from a certain Meridian And indeed in my Judgment for the avoyding of confusion The Authors Judgment about the words Latitude and Longitude it were better to abstain from the use of these words Longitude and Latitude and to use these in their stead the distance from the Aequator and the distance from the Meridian but seeing that for so many Ages this hath been received therefore it will be a hard matter to abolish it wherefore in the following Discourse I shall also use the said terms Latitude and Longitude Moreover the Latitude of a place as the Latitude of the whole Earth hath some noted Points of the Earth for the beginning of the Numeration viz. the Poles and the Aequator but the Longitude of the Earth because it is extended about the whole Earth hath no certain beginning or end but the beginning and end is every where because the Periphery is like to an infinite Line Wherefore any Point of the Aequator may be taken for the beginning of the Longitude of the Earth and the Meridian passing through that Point for the first Meridian from whence the Meridians of all the Points of the Earth are numbred or the Longitude of them Calculated Now why we require these two distances in every Point of the Earth viz. one from the Aequator and the other from a certain Meridian shall be shewed in the Third Proposition Proposition II. To place and determinate the first Meridian and the beginning of the Numeration for the Longitude of the places in the Globe of the Earth We have said in the preceeding Proposition that every Point of the Aequator may be taken for the beginning of the extension of the Earth according to Longitude See Proposition 1. and that from its Meridian the Longitudes of places must be reckoned but because we cannot take all at once it is better to fix one beginning or to choose some certain Point but that is left to the choice of persons Therefore Geographers have taken a certain place in the Superficies of the Earth through which the first Meridian shall be drawn and should shew in the Aequator where it cutteth it this beginning of reckoning of the Longitude of places But all have not taken the same place for the first Meridian but divers Ptolomy hath taken that near to the Fortunate Islands which he removeth but only one deg from the first and hence towards the Oriental quarter through Africa and Asia he reckoneth the rest of the Meridians The Longitude of places where begun by Ptolomy and Longitude of places For seeing it was less free to place a beginning the Ancients chose rather to have an account of the places of the Earth which they knew were inhabited which portion doth not return into it self as the Superficies of the Earth and therefore in that portion or part a beginning of Longitude and end may be assigned in another Point Because therefore in the time of Ptolomy the Fortunate Isles where the ultimate ones in the Occidental Quarter of all the Earth or Lands then known Therefore from that bound Ptolomy beginneth to reckon the Longitude of the Earth and having gone forwards to the Oriental Regions he maketh the end of his Numeration of the Meridians in Sina the ultimate Shoar of Asia But in process of time many Regions of the Earth were found to be Inhabited towards the Occid and America was discovered then some Geographers promoted the beginning of Numeration of Longitude towards the Occid For some made the first Meridian at the Isle of St. Nicholas adjacent to Cape Verd in Africa but Hondius chose the Isle of St. James in his Maps The Longitude of places where begun by Hondius Mercator and others Some chose the Meridian of one of the Islands of the Azores which is called Del Corvo for the first Meridian because that in this Isle and the adjoyning Sea the Magnetick Needle is found to have no Declination from the Meridian Line and that it sheweth the Northern and Southern quarter Mercator
place and scituation and therefore very unlike Figures arise thence in the Table thence it cometh to pass that according to the various scituation of the Eye which we attribute to it without the Earth or without that part which it ought to represent there ariseth a various representation of that Superficies on the Table For as there existeth another sort of Frontispiece of the walls of an house when the Eye may behold it from a scituation directly opposite another from an oblique scituation another from an upper place another from a long place and so changing according to the various scituation of the Eye which Tutors may explain by Diagrams so there ariseth a different position of the parts of the Earth to be represented on the Table if that the Eye be so constituted or conceived in the Air in such a scituation that it may hang over the Aequator of the Earth and otherwise if that it be supposed to exist in the pretended Axis of the Earth or in the Semi-Axis of the Hemisphere and otherwise if it be conceived to be eminent over any other place of the Earth Thence it cometh to pass that both the Aequator and the Parallels as well as the Meridians obtain various representations because the Rays drawn from them existing in the Earth to the Eye perforate the Tables in divers points endued with a various scituation which the Readers may easily understand The Direction of a Tutor very profitable if that they have the living information and direction of a Tutor The other which I esteem fit for the Readers consideration in this Method for his better understanding is concerning the cause of the variety in the Magnitude of Tables and representations for we can shew the same Superficies of the Earth as also of all the Bodies of the World as Temples Houses and the like on a great or small Table The Cause is twofold first by how much the Eye is placed more remote from the Earth or any Object by so much the representation receiveth the lesser Magnitude ziz the scituation of the Table or Glass so remaining 2. How much the Table or Glass in which the representation should be made by the perforation of the Rays is nearer moved to the Eye by so much the representation or projecture receiveth the lesser form by how much the nearer to the Object so much the greater But if the Eye may be removed in any kind from the Object the Table remaining so that it be removed in the same Line with the Center of the Earth or so that it remain in one Perpendicular Line to the Superficies of the Earth therefore the Figure of the projecture is not changed but only the Magnitude the similitude remaineth So also if that the Table be any ways moved to the Eye or removed towards the Object all the projectures do become of a divers Magnitude yet they remain mutually alike and represent all the places in a like scituation so that the Table shall observe the Parallel scituated from the Eye in his access and recess But if the Table receiveth another position and also if the Eye be not only removed but also recedeth from that Perpendicular Line then the like projectures shall not arise and the places shall not have the like scituation on the Earth but besides a various Magnitude there shall also be a notable dissimilitude in the scituation of the places one to the other But in the projectures of all Bodies as also in the projecture of the Superficies of the Earth it is so wont to happen that we attribute such a scituation to the Table or Glass that it may touch the Body or Superficies in that Point to which the Line drawn is Perpendicular to the Superficies of the Body or which is drawn from the Eye to the Center of the Earth now to obtain the lesser or greater projecture we remove the Point of the Eye more or less from the Earth But then we conceive the Earth to be very small This in general being explained concerning the projecture of the Earth and the Original of Geographical Maps we shall shew the Method of doing it where first we shall shew whether these Tables should be made according to the Rules of Perspective and whether all may be made according to them for the end of these Tables or Maps is to the life and exactly as may be to express the scituation of the places in the Superficies of the Earth Therefore it is demanded and that not unadvisedly whether this may be done by another Method which observeth not the Rules of Perspective for whether it be done according to the Rules of Perspective or contrary to them so that it exactly representeth the scituation of the places the Table shall be accounted to be well done To that I answer that although certain Tables of some small Province may be made and are also made by another Method to wit by Angles of position or also by distances as we shall shew in the last place yet in a great part of the Superficies of the Earth it cannot be performed by a more commodious Method than by the Rules of Perspective although the true scituation of the places may not be represented in the Tables made according to these Rules Things to be known about the making of these Maps For we must know that in making of these Maps we must attend to a threefold end 1. That all the places must have such a scituation and distance to the chief Circles of the Earth as the Aequator the Parallels the Meridians as they have in the Earth it self so that from those Tables the Parallels of every place the distance from the Aequator from the Pole the Zone the Climate c. may be beheld because that from thence many properties of the Regions and Celestial appearances do depend 2. That the Magnitudes of every Region may have that proportion that they have in the Earth it self 3. That every place may have the same scituation to the other mutually which they have in the Earth it self Of these three requisites all Maps or Tables ought exactly to perform the first and for the most part exactly do because they are made from the Table of Latitude and Longitude of places neither do the Rules of Perspective hinder the same But for the second they cannot accurately perform the same if that the Rules of Perspective be observed because the crooked paths of the Superficies being more remote from the Eye makes the representation lesser in the Glass than those parts subjected to the Eye but yet that inequality is small and becometh insensible if that the Eye be conceived to be remote an infinite interval from the Earth But the third requisite can be performed by no larger Tables such are those of the whole Earth also those of the 4 quar of the Earth and the greater Provinces although they may accomplish it in the lesser Regions and the vulgar suppose
be found in the Hemisphere only except the Horizon of the Pole which is the very Aequator So we shall have three or four chief Points through which the Horizon ought to pass To find out the other Points there is no more commodious way than by the benefit of the Globe viz. let the Pole be Elevated for the Latitude of the place assumed then in every Parallel let one Point be chosen through which the first Meridian passeth and let that be brought to the Meridian which done let the degree under the Meridian be noted and so you must do in every Parallel These being noted let so many degrees be reckoned on both sides from every Parallel from the Meridian of the place given in the Map on the Aequator viz. for 10th 20th 30th and so on and where the Meridians cut the convenient Parallels they shall be the points demanded to wit through which the Horizon is to be drawn and the scituation of the other places may be examined in some measure at that By this Method the whole Superficies of the Earth may almost be represented on one Table if that either of the Poles viz. the Antarctick be assumed for the Eye if a Table or Glass plain be taken of any Parallel near the Pole for instance the plain of the Arctick Pole and the Antarctick Circle on one plain neither doth any thing else remain to be done or added to the former construction but that the Meridian Lines should be protracted and the Parallels drawn from the other part of the Aequator Then let the whole Ecliptick be drawn and if you please let the Horizon be compleated But seeing that the parts and degrees scituated beyond the Aequator towards the Antarctick Pole by this Mode would become far greater than the parts about and in the Aequator which is contrary to the truth of the matter therefore it is better to make the projecture on two Hemispheres that one may shew the Arctick Orb the other the Antarctick Tables described according to this Method are very few to general Maps of Right Lines two other Maps very small described in this Method are wont to be added whereof one exhibiteth the Regions about the Arctick Pole the other those about the Antarctick which the Reader may look upon for the better understanding of what hath been said But these are better learned from practice than from precepts The second Mode the Eye being placed in the plain of the Aequator The second Mode See Scheme The preceeding Mode of describing of Geographical Maps doth neither fitly shew the Magnitudes and scituation of places neither is commodious to describe the Hemisphere intercepted between the two Poles and to represent all the places lying in the same Meridian moreover it seemeth to be repugnant to our conception that the Pole of the Earth should fall into the Center and therefore those described Tables afford a more difficult imagination Therefore another Method hath been found which is somewhat more hard than the former but more aptly representeth the places of the Earth and removeth the Pole from the Aequator For the conceiving of this Method we must understand the Superficies of the Earth to be cut into two Hemispheres from the whole Periphery of the Meridian and in two Tables we exhibit those Hemispheres one in one the other in the gther The Eye is placed in the Point of the Aequator which is removed 90 degrees from the first Meridian the Table or Glass in which this representation ought to be made is assumed the place of the first Meridian and Hemisphere which lyeth beneath that Plain in respect of the Eye is taken to represent it on the Plain In this form of projecture the Semicircle of the Aequator becometh a right Line and that Meridian which is distant from the first 90 degrees unto which the eye is conceived eminent will also become the Right Line all the other Meridians and all the Parallels of the Aequator become the Arches of the Circles because their Cones are cut from the Plain of the Tables by a subcontrary Section The explication of which must be demanded from the Conical Doctrine and may better be shewed than expressed But the Ecliptick becometh a portion of the Eclipsis for the Cause alledged in the former Method The description Mathematically explained This Description is thus made the point E being taken for the Center in the Table a great or small Periphery of the Circle is described A B C D as we desire to have the Table great or small This representeth the first Meridian and its opposite viz. the Diameter B D being drawn there arise two Semiperipheries whereof one B A D is the first Meridian the other B C D is the opposite or of Longitude 180. This Diameter B D representeth the Meridian 90 degrees distant from the first and his point D is one Pole viz. the Arctick but the point D is the Pole Antarctick the Diameter A C to B D is the perpendicular Line of the Aequator Let these Quadrants A B B C C D D A be divided every one into 90 degrees Moreover we must do thus for the representation of the Meridians and Parallels or for the finding out the Arches of the Meridians and Parallels First the Line of the Aequator A C must be divided into its degrees to wit 180 because it only sheweth half the Aequator or A E E C into 90 after this Mode from the point D let the Semiperipheries right Lines A B C be drawn to every degree or which is as well let the Rule be applyed to the point D and to every degree of the Semiperiphery A B C these Lines shall cut the Line of the Aequator into 180 parts which shall represent the degrees which are the degrees of Longitude and therefore the numbers 1 2 3 4 and the like must be ascribed beginning from the first Meridian D A B. Through every one of these points 1 2 3 and both the Poles B D the Arches of the Circles must be described which shall represent the Meridians But how the Periphery must be described through these three given points for Example B D or B 2 D and the like is taught by Geometry viz. you must find the Centers for every Periphery to be described which Centers are placed in the very Line of the Aequator as is the Center E of the Meridian D A B. Those points are found according to Euclids Method Proposition 1. Lib. 3. if the Lines B 1 B 2 B 3 See Euclide lib. 3. Proposition 1. c. be doubly cut by the perpendicular lines this is most easy by the application of the Rule where these perpendicular lines fall into the protracted Line E C of the Aequator if there be need there are the Centers for the describing of the Arches B 1 D B 2 D c. But the Centers of the Arches B 91 D B 92 D B 93 D c.
Circle And 180 deg makes 2700 German miles wherefore no places are distant more than 2700 German miles But the condition of an Itinerary distance is otherwise Proposition V. The distance of the Antipodes is 2700 German miles or 180 degrees The distance of the Antipodes The shortest distance amongst the Antipodes is not one but infinite and those all equal although to speak properly they cannot be called the shortest distances but those than which none are shorter The Circular distances amongst the Antipodes are all greater Peripheries no lesser of which between other places there are infinite which are not opposed to the Diameter A Periphery passing through two places also passeth through the Antipodes of these places The distance of any places of the two which belong to the Antipodes taken together make 180 degrees Therefore the distance of one place being known from the other the distance also of that place shall be known from the place of the other of the Antipodes These Five Propositions are of so manifest a truth that any one weighing of them may easily discern and understand them Proposition VI. Any place being given on the Superficies of the Globe to exhibit all those place which may have one and the same distance from that given place but the given distance must not be greater than 2700 German miles Let the given place be brought to the Brazen Meridian let the Pole be Elevated according to to the Latitude of the place let the Quadrant be affixed to the Vertical point Moreover let the given distance be turned into degrees which degrees must he numbred on the Quadrant from the Vertical point Let the term of the Numeration be noted with Chalk then let the Quadrant be brought round on the Superficies of the Globe the noted point will shew all the places of the Earth which have the given distance from the given place Or let the deg of the changed distance be taken on the Aequator by the interval of the Compass and one Foot fixed on the given place let the other be brought round The places through which it passeth are those demanded But if the deg arising from the changed distance are more than 90 that is than a Quadrant let their Complement be taken at 180 and let the place of the Antipodes be brought to the Superiour Semicircle of the Brazen Meridian let the Pole be Elevated for its Latitude and the Quadrant affixed to the Vertical point and let the deg of the Complement be accounted on it and let the term of the Numeration be noted with Chalk If then the Quadrant be turned about all the places demanded which have the given distance from the given place shall have the noted point But if you will do the business with the Compass use the Method of the Chorographical Maps Proposition VII Of the Cause why the Itinerary distance is greater than the true or short and Geographical The reasons why the Itinerary distance is greater than the true short and Geographical 1. The unpassable Woods which lie between some places 2. High Mountains and low Valleys 3. Marishes and Water in general if you mean Land Voyages 4. In Sea Voyages the procurrent Lands and Islands hinder the direct Voyage 5. Peculiar Fluxes of the Sea And 6. The Winds But some may demand whether it be not possible that there may be places whose Itinerary distance is lesser than the most short Geographical To this I answer although to Sense the Figure of the Earth be Spherical yet I have shewed in the first Book that this Figure is not altogether Geometrical but is rendred unequal by many places Elevated and depressed Therefore if we conceive a certain Superficies of the Earth or the distance of the Superficies from the Center for Example the vulgar Semidiamiter of 860 miles in respect of which places are to be taken Elevated or depressed this being supposed I say there may be two places so scituated that the Itinerary distance may be lesser than the shorter Geographical which is removed 860 miles from the Center but the intermedial place must be more depressed Proposition VIII To find out the distance of two places given on the Globe as also in Geographical Maps The finding out the distance of two places given on the Globe Let one of the given places be brought to the Brazen Meridian let the Quadrant be affixed to the Vertex and let it be applyed to the other given place then let the degrees intercepted between the Vertex and this place be numbred let these degrees be turned into miles or another measure in which we would know the distance of those places this shall be that demanded Or let the interval of two places be taken with the Compasses and this being translated to the Aequator let it be considered how many degrees it possesseth in this for these are the distances of the places which we must convert into miles or some other measure But if that the distance be greater than can be taken by the Quadrant or Compasses viz. more than 90 degrees the distance of one place from the Antipodes of the other shall be lesser than 90 degrees Let this be enquired after and taken from 180 degrees the remaining degrees shall be the distance required In Universal Maps as also in Particular of great parts the distance of places cannot be exactly found but in Particular Chorographical Maps a Scale of Leagues or miles is usually added by the assistance of which the distance of places contained in those Maps is known For so if you take the interval of two places and transfer this into the Scale you shall presently know the distance of those places But if the Map be of any greater proportion this Method is defective for no Map can be made by any Method which exhibiteth the true distance of places but such an one may be made which may shew the distance of one place from all the rest as we have said in our Method of making Maps Proposition IX The Latitude and Longitude of two places being given to find their distance The Latitude and Longitude of two places being given to find their distance The solution of this Problem is easy by the Globe and Catholick Planisphere it is difficult by Calculation and Trigonometrical Supputation It is performed on the Globe after this Mode let any Meridian be taken and let the difference of the Longitude of places be numbred from it in the Aequator let the term of the Numeration be brought under the Brazen Meridian and let the Latitude of the other place be reckoned on this let the point of the Globe which is under the term of the Numeration be noted with Chalk also in the first Meridian let the point of Latitude be noted for the other place Then let the interval be taken between the noted points with the Compasses and let it be transferred either into the Aequator or first Meridian so we shall know
unto a certain quarter or the Billows are rould unto a certain quarter If therefore the Ship be directed into the same quarter the way made will be greater than the conjecture maketh it but if into a contrary it will be lesser 2. Because the Ship is carried by other Causes into other quarters and so by windings arriveth at another place 3. The winds are variously changed 4. By how much a Ship hath the greater Altitude by so much its Motion seemeth more slow though it be not so Proposition V. To observe the Latitude of a place unto which a Ship is arrived The Seamen observe it by the Sun in the day time and by the Stars in the night as we have shewed in the XXIII Chapter they use Three Instruments See Chap. 23. the Astrolabe the Radius and the Triangle Proposition VI. From whence it is manifest that the Methods used by Seamen to find the places on the Maps unto which they have arrived are fallacious because that they can neither be certain of the Rhombe or quarter of the way or of the quantity of the way made or of the observed Latitude of the place yet the observation of the Latitude of the place unto which they are arrived because that it is not less subject to error especially the Air and Sea being tranquillous may be exempted from this fallacy But from that alone the place it self is not found on the Map or Earth but a second is required viz. either a distance from another place given or a Rhombe by which they Sail from the given place to that or lasty the Longitude of that place from this We have said that the observation of the way made or distance is uncertain as also that of the Rhombs Therefore they return back to find out the Longitude of the place For the Latitude and Longitude of the place being known the place it self is found on the Maps and determined on the Globe of the Earth Whence it is evident that the Art of Navigation requireth the solution of this Problem to the making up of its perfection viz. to find out the Longitude of the place where we are at any time and on any day The prize is propounded let him win who can A MAPP or GENERALL CARTE of the WORLD Designed in two Plaine Hemisphers By Monsieur Sanson Geograph r to the French King and Rendered into English and Illustrated with Figures by Richard Blome By the Kings Especiall Command To the High and Mighty Monarch Charles the Secâââ by the Grace of God King of England Scotland France and Ireland Defendor of the Faith c. This Mapp in all Humility is Dedicated by your Majesties obedient subiect and sarvant Richard Blome A GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORLD Taken from the WORKS Of the Famous Monsieur SANSON Late Geographer to the present French King To which are Added About an hundred GEOGRAPHICAL and HYDROGRAPHICAL TABLES of the Kingdoms Countreys and Isles in the World with their Chief Cities and Sea-Ports drawn from the MAPS of the said Monsieur Sanson and according to the Method of the said Description Illustrated with MAPS The Second Part. By RICHARD BLOME Printed in the Year 1680. Geographical TABLES On or above the Surface of the Terrestrial Globe and Maps of the World ought to be understood and noted Ten Points of which Four are called Cardinal Points as the North or the Pole Artick the South or the Pole Antartick the East the West Four are called Collateral Points as the East of the Summer the East of the Winter the West of the Summer the West of the Winter And two as Above and Under us as the Zenith the Nadir Ten Circles or Lines of which Five are Parallels the one to the other as the Aequinoctial or the Aequator the two Tropicks as the Tropick of Cancer the Tropick of Capricorn The two Polar Circles as the circle of the Pole Artick the circle of the Pole Antartick Five others are different the one from the others as in the middle of the Zodiack as the Ecliptick the Horizon as the Horizon rational the Horizon sensible or visible the Parallels or the degrees of Latitude the Meridians or the degrees of Longitude Two Colures in which are 4 Points which note our four Seasons of the year to wit above the colures of the Aequinoxes as the Spring the Autumn the colures of the Solstices as the Summer the Winter Three sorts of Zones in which are five to wit one Torrid or the Parching two Temperate as the temperate Artick or Northernly the temperate Antartick or Southernly two Frozen or Cold as the frozen Artick or Northernly the frozen Antartick or Southernly Three sorts of Shadows which diversly receive the Inhabitants of the five Zones for they are in the Torrid Zone Amphisciens in the Temperate Zones Northernly Northern Heterosciens Southernly Southern Heterosciens in the Frozen Zones Northernly Northern Perisciens Southernly Southern Perisciens Three sorts of Positions as the Inhabitants about the same Parallel opposite in Meridian are Perioeciens the Inhabitants about one Meridian opposed in their Parallels are Antoeciens the Inhabitants opposed both in Meridians and in Parallels are Antipodes The Climates of which the Ancients first made seven which they call by the most famous Places Seas and Rivers by which they passed as dia that is through Meroes dia Sienes dia Alexandrias dia Rhodou dia Pontou dia Boristenon then mâe in adding dia Ripheon dia Danias the Moderns made 30 to wit between the Aequator and the Polar circle 24 by half hours between the Polar circle and the Pole 6 by Months The Parallels which are following the Ancients 14 between the Aequator and Polar circle 48 by quarters of hours following the Moderns 60 between the Polar circle and the Pole 12 by fourteen days The Winds whereof the 4 Firsts and whereof the names are Monosyllables shall be called Cardinal Winds as North South East West 4 Seconds and whereof the names are of two syllables and composed of two of the four Firsts shall be called Collateral Winds as North-east North-west South-east South-west 8 Thirds and have their names of three syllables composed of one of the four Firsts and of one of the four Seconds as North North-east North North-west South South-east South South-west East North-east East South-west West North-west West South-west North and a quarter by North-east North and a quarter by North-west North-east and a quarter by North North-west and a quarter by North. 16 Fourths taking their names from four Firsts or four Seconds in saying of one fourth part by the other and that without having regard to the eight Third winds c. as it were South and a quarter by South-east South and a quarter by South-west South-east and a quarter by South South-west and a quarter by South East and a quarter by North-east East and a quarter by South-east North-east and a quarter by East South-east and a quarter by East West and a
Ebuisa of about 150 miles in circuit whose chief place is so called and its Port is Magno The chief Commodity which it affordeth is Salt of which here is made a great quantity And about ten miles from this Isle is the other called PORMENTERA Isle of Pormentara which is about fifty miles in circuit The People are excellent Swimmers as well the Women as the Men. The Air of the whole Country of Spain is generally good and healthful and the Soil fertil enough were it well cultivated but the thinness of its Inhabitants since their setling in America is the chief cause thereof The whole Country is Catholick It hath 11 Archbishops 56 Bishops 20 or 25000 Parishes and abundance of very rich Abbeys and Monasteries Chief Rivers in Spain In Spain are five great Rivers viz. the Douro the Tagus or Tago the Guadiana the Guadalquiver and the Ebro or Iborus The Douro is esteemed for force the Tagus for its renown the Guadalquiver for its riches the Ebro for its name and the Guadiana not having wherewith to answer the others for shame hides it self under ground Chief Hills in Spain The chief Hills in Spain are Seir Morena being a chain of Hills declining from the midst of Spain towards the Streights of Gibraltar and upon these Hills it was that Cervantes the Wit of Spain made the Scene of the many Warlike exploits atchieved by the flower of Knight Errantry Don Quixot de la Manche 2. Inbalda or Idubalda which extends it self from the Pyreniae towards Portugal And 3. Seira Nevada which from East to West crosses Granada and are very high Hills ITALY ought to be considered in three or four principal Parts which shall be those of LOMBARDY which may be divided into the Higher where are the Estates of PIEDMONT which belongs to the Dutchy of SAVOY and comprehends the Dutchy of Aost Aoste Signieury of Verceil Verceili Principality of Piedmont Turine County of Ast Astr Marquisate of Saluce Saluzzo County of Nice Nizza or Nice MILLAIN which comprehendeth the Dutchy of Millan Millan Lake of Como Como Lodesan Lodi Cremonese Cremona Pavese Pavia Tortonese Tortona Alexandrin Alexandria Laumelline Valenca Novarese Novara GENES or GENOA which is divided in The Eastern River Getroa Sarzana The Western River Savona Arbengue Vintimiglia MONTFERRAT To the Duke of Mantoua Alba. To the Duke of Savoy Trin. Lower where are the Estates of The REPUBLICK of VENICE which possesseth the Provinces or Parts of Bergamase Bergarne Cremase Crema Bressan Brescello Veronois Verona Vicentin or Vicentinois Vizenzo Padouan Padoua Polâsâne de Rovigo Rovigo Coast of Trevisane Trevigi Feltrân Feltri Bellânois Belluno Cadorin Cadore Friouli Cuidad de Austria Aquileja Palma la Nova Istriâ Cabo d'Itria Dogâdo or Dutchy of Venice MANTOA Dukedom of Mantoua Mantoua PARMA and PLACENZA Dukedom of Parma Parma Dukedom of Placenza Placenza MODENA and REGGE Dukedom of Modena Modena Dukedom of Regge Reglo or Regge TRENT Bishoprick and County of Trent In the one and the other Lombardy are divers small Estates among the which is Mirandola ITALY particularly so called where are The Estates of the CHURCH Towards the Gulph of Venice as Dukedom of Ferrarese Ferrara Bolognois Bologna Romandiola Ravenna Dutchy of Urbin Urbin Coast of Ancone Ancona Towards the Tyrrhenian Sea as County of Citti di Castello Perusin Perugia Ombria or the Dutchy of Spoleto Orvietin Orvieto Terre Sabine Narvi St. Peters Patrimony Veij Campagna di Roma Rome or Roma Among the Estates of the Church are Dutchy of Castro Castro Republick of St. Marino The Estates of TOSCANY To the Great DUKE of TOSCANY Florence Florence Sanase or Siennois Sienâ Pisan Pisa Livourne or Ligorne To divers Princes as the Republick of Lucque Principality of Alassa Signieury of Piombine Isle of Elbe Cosmopoli The Kingdom of NAPLES sometime divided in TERRA di LAVARO CALABRIA But at present into twelve Provinces whereof are Six towards the Tyrrhenean Sea to wit Terra di Lavora Naples Cajeta Principato citra or Interiour Amalfi Salerno Principato ultra or Exteriour Benevento Conza Calabria citra Cosenza Calabria ultra Regium Basilicate Cirenza Six towards the Gulph of Venice to wit Terra di Otranto Otranto Brundufium Gallipoli Brindici Tetra di Bari Bari Capitanate or Pugi Manfredonia Mont St. Angelo County of Molise Abruzzo citra or Interiour Lanciano Sulmona Civita di Chietti Abruzzo ultra or Exteriour Civita di Penna Aquila PUGIA ABRUZZO And to which for the fourth part may be added The Isles and Kingdoms of SICILE or SICILY Messina Palermo Siracusa Montreale and Cataliâ SARDAGNE or SARDINIA Cagliari Bosa and Sassari CORCE or CORSICA Bastia Mariana and Calvi Together with several small Isles as those of Naples Liguria c. some of which are taken notice of in the Descriptional part The Estates of the DUKE of SAVOY are On this side the ALPES to wit The DUTCHY of SAVOY where there are the Provinces of Genevois Annecy la Roche Alby Thonnon Vieux Faussigni Cluse Bonneville Bonne Sallanche Taninge Chablais Thonon Evian St. Gingot Savoy Chambery les Eschelles Montmelian Ayguebelle Conflans Beaufort Ugine Miolans Aix and Rumilly Tarentaise Monftiers St. Jaqu ' Esme le bourg St. Morice Morienne St. Jaan de Morienne la Chaâobre Modane Laââebourg And Beugey in part Yenne St. Genis d'Hoste The COUNTY of NICE where are the Vicarats of Nice or Nizza Nice or Nizza Ville Franche Poget Poget Barcellonnette Barcellonnette le Lauset Sospelle Sospelle Saorgiz And the Val St. Esteve St. Esteve St. Salvador Counte of Boglio or of Beuil Beyond the ALPES to wit PIEDMONT under the name of which is understood the Dutchy of Aoste Aoste Castillion Bard. Marquisate of Yvree Yvree Pont St. Martin Signiory of Verceil Verceilli Crescerâtin Borzane Biele Andorne Gartintra Marquisate of Suze Suze Avillarâe Principality of Piedmont Turin or Turino Mondouj Fossan Chivas Rivoli Javen Carignan Pancalier Vigon Cavours Ville franque Raconis Savillan Coni Tende Ceve Cortemille Bene Quierase Quiers Moncalier Cocconas Verue Counte of Ast Asti Ville neuved ' Ast Saluce or Saluzzo Marquisate of Saluce Carmagnole Barges Revel Droners Cental Rocqu ' Esparviere Demont Quarter of Piedmont or at present belonging to Fracne Pignerol Perouse Lucerne Brigueras The DUTCHY of MONFERAT On the Coast of GENES In part where are Albe Trin and Aqui. The Marquisate of Oneglia Marro In PIEDMONT restored from the Church the Printipality of Masseran The DUTCHY of SAVOY preteneth to Geneve Chypre c. LOMBARDY which may be divided into the Higher and comprehendeth the Estates of PIEDMONT as it belongs to the Duke of Savoy where are the Dutchy of Aost Aoste Ivree Seignieury of Verceili Verceili Principality of Piedmont Turin Fossan Mondevi or Mondoui Suze Savillan Coni Quierase Quiers County of Ast Asti Marquisate of Saluce Saluce or Saluzzo Carmagnole County of Nice Nizza or Nice Barcelonnette MILLAN as it belongs to the Catholick King where are the Dutchy of Millan Millain Val
the Danube Northward about 2000 which large extent was the cause of its ruine and declension The Ancient Romans The Ancient Romans were a gallant People of a sound Judgment and a ready Wit well skilled in Arts and Sciences very covetous of glory of great Valour as by their subduing the chief part of the World who contrary to the custom of Invaders to sack and ruine Countries they taught the People Manners Literature c. The Romans were the first that wore the Purple Robe and the beginners of Triumphs they had excellent and stately Theaters and it was hold no disreputation to be an Actor It s fertility and Commodities This Country is so exceedingly furnished with whatsoever may be found useful for Man and the Soil so rich and fer tile in Grains Fruits Rice c. in some places having threo Harvests in one year that it is esteemed the Garden of the World The chief Commodities for Merchandize that this Country yieldeth are Silks both raw and wrought into several fabricks as Sattins Taffities Plushes Velvets Cloth of Gold and Silver Damasks Grograms Rashes Fustians Glasses Alom Armour excellent Wines Oils Saffron Anni seeds Argal Brinistone several Metals Olives Almonds Galls Kids-skins Lute strings Quicksilver Aloes Gold Thread Anchoves several Drugs c. The People of Italy The Italians are very ingenious respective and grave exceeding malicious if affronted much addicted to Women which are here allowed the liberty to make use of their own They are generally very jealous of their Wives so that they are denied the liberty of the Streets or the common view or society of men The Women are generally handsom witty and of a seeming modest behaviour it is observed of them that they are Saints in the Church Angels in the Streets Magpies at the Door Syrens in the Windows and Goats in the Gardens Their Language is very eloquent It s chief parts Italy may be considered in three principal Parts viz. Lombardy Italy particularly so called and Naples to which for a fourth may be added the neighbouring Isles in which said parts are divers Estates and Dukedoms all which are at large set down in the Geographical Tables and of these parts in order LOMBARDY Parts of Lombardy Lombardy is divided into the Higher and Lower in the Higher are the Estates of Piedmont which belongs to the Duke of Savoy of Millan which belongs to the Catholick King of the Commonwealth of Genes or Genoa and of Montferrat which belongs to the Duke of Mantoua yet the Duke of Savoy hath some part thereof And in the Lower Lombardy are the Estates of Venice of Mantoua Parma and Modena which have their Dukes and of Trent which hath its Bishop And in the one and the other Lombardy are several small Estates amongst which is that of Mirandola The Estates of PIEDMONT washed by the Mediterranean Sea is exceeding fertil though inferiour to other parts of Lombardy It is divided betwixt the Dukes of Savoy and Mantoua the River Tener separating their possessions It is very populous numbring about 160 walled Cities and Towns of which the chief is Turin Chief places which is the Palace and Court of the Duke of Savoy it is also dignified with the See of an Archbishop and an Vniversity where the famous Erasmus proceeded Dr. of Divinity 2. Aoste or Avost seated on the Northern limits of the Country 3. Verceili a Town of great strength bordering on Millan to which it did once belong 4. Saluzzo a Marquisate and Bishops See 5. Nizza or Nice a Sea-port Town and serveth for Turin and 6. Asti. And since we have before omitted it before we pass further let us repass the Alpes and speak of the Territories of this Duke on this side which is the Country of Savoy from whence he bears his Title Country of Savoy SAVOY adjoyning to Piedmont is a Country very Mountainous and full of narrow passages and consequently not very fertil It s chief City is Chambery or Cambreria the residence of the Duke when he is in these parts seated in a pleasant Valley amongst Mountains which are well stored with beautiful Houses belonging to the Gentry of these parts and next Turante which commands the passage into Italy It s other places of account are Thonon Cluse Beaufort Vgine Montiers Yenne Modane c. The Dutchy of MILLAN is rich in Natures gifts being seated in the best part of Lombardy affording great plenty of Grains Wines Oils and Silks and is said to have the best Rice in the World It hath for its chief places Chief places 1. Millan which notwithstanding its often spoils is said to be the greatest City of all Lombardy It is seated in a wide Plain wherein are no less pleasant than profitable Meadows and Rivers it is strongly fortified with a Wall and a spacious and almost impregnable Castle besides its Fortifications it is beautified with many splendid Ornaments the chief of which are its Vniversity its Hospital liberally endowed seated in an Isle almost two miles in compass and capable to give entertainment to about 4000 Sick persons Its Schools Nunneries and Churches which amount in all to 238 most of which are stately structures and beautified with curious Paintings Images of the Saints Sepulchres and several Religious Antiquities The whole City is about seven miles in circuit is exceeding populous very rich and of a great Commerce affording sundry good Commodities 2. Pavia seated on the River Tacinus honoured with a famous Vniversity of note for the Battel in which Francis the first of France was taken Prisoner by the Emperour Charles the Fifth who for his ransom was forced to release all his Title and interest to the Kingdom of Naples and this Dutchy of Millan 3. Cremona seated on the banks of the Poe first built in the beginning of the Punick War It is a place of good account hath a considerable Trade beautified with well built Houses with the conveniency of curious Gardens and hath large and well ordered Streets It is of most note for its high Tower and Cathedral Church where are to be seen many Relicks of Saints and curious Pictures 4. Como seated on a Lake so called which is about fifty miles in circuit on which the Citizens use to recreate themselves in Boats It is a City of good Antiquity and here it was that both the Plinys were born 5. Alexandria which from a poor Village through the often ruins of Millan is now become a fair strong and flourishing Town 6. Lodi 7. Tortona 8. Valenca and 9. Novara State of Genoua The State of GENES or GENOVA once very large but at present possesseth only Liguria in the Continent and the Isle of Corsica of which we shall speak in place more convenient The People are much addicted to Traffick and Vsury and here the Women are allowed the liberty of the Streets as also to accompany or discourse with Men which is forbidden them in other parts
was removed to Chichester Arundel Arundel pleasantly seated near a Forest so called and on the Banks of the Arum over which it hath a Bridge It is an ancient Borough Town governed by a Major and sub-Officers and amongst its Immunities sends Burgesses to Parliament it was once of note for its ancient and strong Castle which flourished in the time of the Saxon Empire The Town is indifferent large and its Houses well built and hath a Market Horsham Horsham seated near St. Leonards Forest said to be so called from Horsa Brother to Hengist who were the first Leaders of the English Saxons into this Isle It is a large Borough Town governed by Bailiffs sends Burgesses to Parliament is the place where the County Goal is kept as also the Assizes and hath a very great Market on Saturdays for Corn and all sorts of Provisions especially Fowl which is bought up by London Haglers New Shorham seated on an Arm of the Sea Shorham which renders it to be a place of some Trade and would be more had it but a good harbour for Ships It is a Town Corporate governed by a Constable and Burgesses electeth Parliament men but hath not the benefit of a Market Lewes scituate on the banks of the Arun a Town of good antiquity Lewes where King Athelstan appointed the Mintage of his Money It is a Town Corporate governed by 2 Constables enjoys several Immunities electeth Parliament men and hath a very good Market for Corn and Provisions on Saturdays This Town for fairness of Buildings and Streets populousness of Inhabitants both of Gentry and Tradesmen and largeness numbring 6 Parish Churches and having large Suburbs may be esteemed one of the best Towns in the County At the entrance of the River Arun into the Sea is New-haven of late made a pretty secure Harbour for Ships which hither put in in Foul weather which these Seas are subject unto East-Grinsted seated on an Eminence Grinsted a small Borough Town on the confines of the County towards Surrey is graced with a fair Church hath the election of Parliament men is governed by a Bailiff and Burgesses is the place where the Assizes are often held and hath a good Market on Thursdays Winchelsey of good antiquity Winchelsey and once of far greater account than now it is and that occasioned by the Seas unkindness in forsaking it yet doth it still enjoy its Priviledges as keeping of Courts in being a Member of one of the Cinque-Ports in sending Burgesses to Parliament and by being governed by a Major who is Lord of Yarmouth for the Fishing-Trade and Jurats The Town is seated on a Rock or sandy Cliff and on an Inlet of the Sea where it makes 4 Cataracts and were its Haven not choaked up it would be a place of Trade It was formerly a large Town numbring 18 Parish Churches which are all reduced to ruin except one and its Buildings also wasted and ruinous for want of Inhabitants so that its Market is now disused Rye one of the Cinque-Port Towns Rye which began to flourish upon the decay of Winchelsey being walled about where the Cliffs defend it not in the Reign of King Edward the Third It is at present a fair and well-built Town with paved Streets is well inhabited and frequented chiefly by Fisher-men being of note for its excellent Herrings here taken and for being the ready Port-Town to Normandy It is governed by a Major and Jurats hath a commodious Haven and hath weekly 2. Markets viz. on Wednesdays and Saturdays which are very well served with Corn and Provisions Hastings of good antiquity being Incorporated Hastings governed by a Major and Jurats is one of the Cinque-Ports enjoys large Immunities and is of note for being the place where William the Conquerour set up his Fortress at his Landing at Balver-hith not far distant where he caused his Fleet to be burnt It is a large Town containing 2 Parish Churches chiefly composed of as many Streets in each of which there being a Church and its Markets on Wednesdays and Saturdays are well resorted unto and served with Corn and Provisions especially Fish which is here had in great plenty As to the scituation of this Town it is couched between a high Cliff Sea-wards and as high a Hill Land-wards County of Warwick described The County of WARWICK seated as it were in the midst or heart of the Kingdom and participates with her in the best both for richness of Soil pureness of Air and pleasure to its Inhabitants It may be divided into two parts the one called Feldon and the other Woodland and these are in a manner separated by the River Avon which in a crooked passage runneth through the County That called Feldon is more Champain affording rich Meadows feeding store of Cattle and is exceeding grateful to the Husbandman in their Crops of Corn That called Woodland of old Arden took its name from the great plenty of Wood which is now much wasted by the Iron-works and this part is more ungrateful to the Husbandman It is severed into 5 Hundreds in which are numbred 158 Parish Churches and is traded unto by 17 Market Towns Coventry Coventry well seated for an Inland City being esteemed the chief place of Trade in these parts a place very well inhabited and frequented and the more for the great quantities of Cloaths here made and vended It is a fair neat and large City containing 3 Parish Churches of which that of St. Michael and the Holy Trinity are loftily built and is beautified with good Buildings and well ordered Streets and its Cross now lately repaired is composed of curious work and delightful to behold Here it was that Godiva wife to Leofrick Earl of the Mercians for the purchasing the Citizens freedom and to be eased from those heavy Taxes which he imposed upon them for some Offence about Noon-day rode naked through the chief Streets of the City It is a place which enjoyeth several Immunities being a County incorporate of it self having within its Liberties several Towns is governed by a Major 2 Sheriffs and other sub-Officers keepeth Courts for the hearing of Causes and trial of Felons having a Goal for Offenders and sendeth Burgesses to Parliament It is a place well served with Commodities and its Market on Fridays is very great for Corn Cattle Provisions c. Warwick VVarwick a Town of great antiquity said to be built by Gurgunstus almost 400 years before the birth of Christ and in the time of the Romans it was in a very flourishing condition large and populous where they kept a Garrison which was a Band of Dalmatian Horsemen It is at present a Town of good account seated on a steep Rock and washed on the River Avon over which it hath a strong and well-built Stone-Bridge It is indifferent large containing 2 Parish Churches besides several demolished its Houses are well built its Streets well-ordered and large
Wye which receive those many Streams that so plentifully water the County and afford to the Inhabitants great abundance of Fish especially Salmon and Trouts in the Wye Here are seated 61 Parish Churches and 4 Market Towns Brecknock seated at the meeting of the Rivers Hodney and Vske Brecknock over which it hath a fair Stone-bridge It is a place of good antiquity and at present a very large Bailiwick Town containing 3 Parish Churches one of which is a Collegiate Church its Houses are well built was once strengthned with a stately Castle as also with a strong Wall which gave entrance by 3 Gates It is governed by 2 Bailiffs 15 Aldermen 2 Chamberlains a Town Clerk c. amongst its Immunities sends a Burgess to Parliament is a place well inhabited and the rather as being the Shire-Town where the Assizes are held It enjoyeth a good Trade for Clothing and hath weekly two Markets on Wednesdays and Saturdays which are very well served with Cattle Corn and Provisions About two miles from this Town is a large Meer or Pool some miles in compass called Brecknock-Meer where in former times stood a fair City which was swallowed up by an Earthquake Hay seated between the Wye and the Dulas Hay a Town of good note in the time of the Romans being then sortified with a Castle and a Wall It is at present a good Town and hath a very great Market for Corn Cattle and Provisions on Mondays Bealt pleasantly seated amongst the Woods and on the Banks of the Wye Bealt over which it hath a very large Wooden-Bridge which leads into Radnorshire at present a pretty small Town enjoying a considerable Trade for Stockings and hath weekly two very good Markets on Mondays for Cattle and on Saturdays for Corn and Provisions County of Cardigan CARDIGAN a County of a different Soil and ill clothed with Wood the Southern and Western parts being plain and very fertil yet not without some Hills and its Eastern and Northern parts are Mountainous and not so fertil amongst which is the Plinillimon-Hill a Mountain of a very great extent and height Here are numbred 64 Parish Churches and hath 4 Market Towns Cardigan Cardigan formerly strengthned with a Wall and a fair and spacious Castle built on the side of the Tywye upon a Rock long since brought to ruin It is a Town no less pleasantly than commodiously seated on the said River Tywye over which it hath a fair Stone-bridge sustained by several Arches and is of no great distance from its influx into the Sea and being the Shire-Town where the Assizes are held and the County-Gaol kept is well inhabited and frequented being a large Town though containing but one Church which is a fair Structure and is graced with a well built Shire-Hall with several good Buildings and as a Town Corporate is governed by a Major Aldermen Common Council with sub-Officers enjoyeth several Immunities electeth a Parliament man and hath an indifferent good Market on Saturdays Llanbeder Llanbeder seated on the Tywye over which is a Bridge which leadeth into Caermarden-shire an indifferent good Town governed by a Port-Reive and Steward and hath a Market on Tuesdays which is well resorted unto for Grain and Provisions and from the latter end of April to the beginning of July is very great for Sheep Heifers Cows and Calves Aberysthwy Aberysthwy seated on a Rising-ground and on the Banks of the Ridall near its influx into the Sea a Town once strengthned with a Wall and Castle now ruinated It is a long and ill-built Town governed by a Major with sub-Officers hath a very great Market for Corn Wool Cheese and Provisions on Mondays and is a place much resorted unto by reason of its Fishing-trade and would be more were its Inhabitants industrious Near unto this Town is Lhan-Badernvaur a well-built Town graced with a fair Church which was formerly an Episcopal See and is now the Parish Church of Aberysthwy County of Caermarden CAERMARDEN-SHIRE is generally of a fertil Soil both for Tillage and Pasturage as not being so Mountainous as its Neighbouring Counties and is well watered with Rivers as the Tovye Taoy Lough or Taff which with others discharge themselves into the Sea plentifully serving the Inhabitants with Fish and Fowl and in many places are dug Pit-Coal Here are seated 87 Parish Churches and is traded unto by 8 Market Towns Caermarden Caermarden pleasantly seated on the Towy over which it hath a fair Stone-bridge and is navigable for small Vessels having a good Key for the lading and unlading of their Merchandizes It is a place well inhabited and traded unto and as a Town Corporate is governed by a Major 2 Sheriffs elected out of 16 Burgesses or Aldermen all clad in Scarlet with other sub-Officers Amongst its Immunities electeth a Parliament man keepeth Courts for the trial of Causes is the place where the Assizes are held and hath weekly two Markets on Wednesdays and Saturdays which are very great for Corn Cattle and Provisions both Flesh Fish and Fowl in great plenty This Town glorieth in giving birth to Merlyn that famous British Prophet or South-sayer Llancharn Llangharn or Llangharne seated on the Towye near its influx into the Sea a well-built Town of some Trade having several Vessels belonging to it and its Market which is on Fridays is very good for Corn and Provisions Near unto this Town is a Wich or Salt-work where good quantity of Salt made Llanelly seated on a Creek of the Sea a pretty good Town Llanelly which is well traded unto for Sea-Coal and hath a Market on Thursdays of good account for all sorts of Cattle Corn and Provisions Llandilovawre seated on the Towy over which it hath a fair Bridge Llandilovawre a pretty good Town having two Markets weekly on Tuesdays and Saturdays for Cattle Corn and Provisions and the Parish to which this Town belongeth is about 13 miles in length and 7 or 8 in breadth Llanymdofry seated amongst Rivers Llanymdofry a pretty fair Bailiwick and Town Corporate and hath two very great Markets weekly on Wednesdays and Saturdays for Provisions and the greatest in the County for Cattle and Sheep County of Glamorgan described The County of GLAMORGAN is of a temperate and healthful Air and of a different Soil and Scituation the Northern parts being extreamly Mountainous full of thick Woods very barren and thinly inhabited yet are found to feed good Herds of Cattle and to send forth several fresh Streams the chief amongst which are the Tavye Taff Ogmore Rumney Elay Nid or Neath c. and the Southern part which is washed by the Severn Sea and receiveth the said Rivers is more upon a level is very fertil both for Corn and feeding of great quantities of Sheep and Cattle is well inhabited and thick beset with Towns and Houses of the Gentry This County numbreth 118 Parish Churches and hath the accommodation
Cordovants and of their Hair plain and watered Chamlets also store of Cattle Grains excellent Fruit amongst others their Grapes as big as Pullets-eggs they have plenty of Fowl The fertility Commodities and their Rivers breed store of Fish Province of Ducala Ducala the most Northern part of Morocco and possesses that which is between the River Tensift and Ommiraby a Land fruitful for Grains It s best Cities are 1. Azamor where the Ommiraby enlarges and forms a Gulph to disburthen it self into the Sea which before the Portugals became masters of it had above 5000 Houses It sell again into the hands of the Moors and entirely restored having a strong Garrison 2. Elmadine towards the Sea and in a fair Plain hath been esteemed the Capital of the Country 3. Magrizena-Sanut which they have fortified and on the same Coast have dismantled Tite the easier to fetch in Tribute thence and from the Neighboring places 4. Asafi or Satfy not far from Tensift is strong and hath a good Trade where the French hath a Consul Kingdom of Morocco The Kingdom of Morocco hath suffered great changes within these few Centuries of years having been often united and as often separated from that of Fez. And sometimes likewise its South parts Sus and Gurula have made a Kingdom apart It s principal Ports are those of Messa Azafi It s chief Ports Promontories and Rivers Mazagan and Azamor Its Promontories those of Guer Ocem Cantin and Carvos Its Rivers the Sus which waters its Southern parts Tensift which divides the Estate in 2 equal parts and Ommiraby which separates it from the Kingdom of Fez. It s Air Fertility and Commodities The Air of the Plains and Fields of Morocco is much hotter then in Europe that of the Mountains according to their height is more or less cold In general this Kingdom is provided with all things necessary for mans life they have Grains and Pulse in abundance as also Fruits which are excellent especially their Grapes They have likewise Flax Hemp Honey Wax Sugar Gold Silver Iron Copper Marble Cordovants Amber Chamlets and many good Manufactures The Kingdom of FEZ Kingdom of Fez. THe Kingdom of FEZ lies between that of Morocco and the Mediterranean and between the Ocean and the Kingdom of Telensin or Argiers Its Provinces are Temesne Fez and Azgar on the Ocean Its Provinces Habat on the Streight Errife and Garret on the Mediterranean Sea and Chaus all up in the Land Province of Temesne Temesne extends its self from Mount Atlas unto the Ocean hath formerly been so flourishing that it numbred 40 Great Cities more then 100 middle sized and 300 little ones besides an infinite number of Villages Besides the Intestine Wars of the Country the Portugals have divers times level'd and ruined the fairest Cities of the Coast as Anfa and Al-Mansor in 1468. and afterwards Rabatt likewise suffered their Incursions and Plunders Rabatt and its Fortress are on a Rising ground between the River of Buragrag and the Seâ King Mansor caused it to be built after the Modell of Morocco but much less and made it one of the most considerable places of all Barbary erecting many Palaces Temples Hospitals Colledges Baines Shops c. and without the South Gate a Tower as high as that of Morocco it was very populous and of a good Trade And because the Waters round about were salt he made an Aquaeduct as beautiful as those about Rome But at present these fair Edifices are almost ruined it being possessed with not above 500 families and much souldiery because of the Neighbourhood of the Portugals most of the ground within the Walls being turned into Gardens Vineyards and Meadows Anfa on the Coast and in a delightful Plain hath been one of the most famous Cities of Africa for its Trade with the English and Portugals but its being addicted to Pyracy was the cause of its ruine as of that of Al-mansor on the River Guir Within the Land Muchaila on the Guir and in the Road from Morocco to Rabat hath been rich well built with a great Territory and fruitful in Grain It was ruined by the Kings of Morocco and is not known at present but for the Tomb of one of their Morabuts whom they esteem a Saint and where the Country people lay in pledg their Ploughs and Instruments of labour which no persons dare touch They have another Morabut near Thagia whom they believe to work Miracles and to preserve them when they are met by Lions a place much frequented by those of Fez as being the Sepulcher of one of their Prophets to which they go in exceeding great numbers in Pilgrimage Adendum towards the Sea well walled and fenced on one side by a Lake or Pool Tegeget above the Ommiraby hath store of Grains where the Arabs have a Toll once of great note The Ornament of this Province and of the whole Kingdom nay we may say of all Barbary is Fez which the Mahometans call the Court of the West It is 100 Thousand paces from the Ocean and as much from the Mediterranean It s form is a long square of which the middle is in a Plain the two ends on Hills and without several Suburbs some of 500 some 1000 and others of 2000 Houses This City bears the name of Fez from the abundance of Gold which was found in the digging the Foundation thereof It hath 12 principal Quarters or Regions 62 great places for Trade and much frequented by Merchants of divers Nations who are allowed a publick meeting place for their Commerce and lodging for their residence and also Store-Houses for their Commodities this place may rather be called a Court than an Exchange it being inclosed within a strong Wall in which are 15 fair Streets for several Nations to meet and reside for the better negotiating of their affairs to this inclosure there are 12 Gates which every night are shut up and kept guarded at the Cities charge for the security of their Goods and Persons Its Houses are well built hath abundance of Temples amongst which about 50 are well built and beautiful The greatest and most sumptuous of all is seated in the heart of the City containing about a Mile in Circuit hath 31 great high Gates and round about are several Porches containing 40 yards in length and 30 in breadth under which are the publick Store-houses of the City The Tower is sustained by 35 Arches in length and by 20 in breadth All the Temple hath 900 and almost all these pieces enriced with Marble It s Revenue is 200 Duckats a day others say 400 which are either 75 or 150 thousand Duckats yearly Within and without the City there are above 200 Hospitals of which 25 are for the sick people of the Country among which one can daily provide for 2000 Persons others are for strangers but their Revenues are much squandred and they give nothing but the Bed and Coverlet but in some
also of a barren Soil and its People also barbarous Batta but indifferent well skill'd in Arms and that being forced to it rather to defend themselves than to offend others It s chief places are Batta Agisymba and Gongou PEMBA is held to be the richest and pleasantest Province of all Congo Pemba being very fertil in Grains Fruits c. hath good Water the Air is healthful the Inhabitants since the Portugals sat footing there are become very civil imitating them both in Behaviour and Apparel It s chief City called Banza that is the Court and which the Portagals call St. Salvador It s chief places is the residence of the King seated on an eminence which discovers the Country on all sides This scituation together with its being in the middle of the Estate gives it a great advantage some esteem it to have 10000 Inhabitants others 100000 possibly those understand 10000 Families and those 100000 Souls for the King being powerful and his Court always great there cannot but be multitudes The Isle and City of Loanda on the Coast of Bamba were not long since in the hands of the Portugals now the East India Company of the Vnited Provinces have seized it It s other chief places are Simba Pemba on the River Danda Lemba and Tinda The chief Rivers of Congo The most famous Rivers of this Kingdom are the Zaire the Lelunda the Danda and the Coanza the three last descend from the Lake of Aquilonda the Zaire from the Lake of Zaire from whence descends likewise the Nile the Zaire hath 400 Leagues course is very rapid by reason of the many Cataracts or great falls which it hath from the Mountains at its entrance into the Estates of Congo it enlarges it self much embraces quantity of Islands and at its Mouth hath no less than 8 or 10 Leagues breadth yet presses its Waters 15 or 20 Leagues farther into the Sea and that with so great a violence that its Waters retain their natural sweetness without being corrupted or intermingled with the Salt-waters of the Sea The Rivers Danda and Coanza are Navigable and receive great Ships The Isle of Loandu is near the Mouth of the last It is observed that when the Sea is high the Springs of Running-water are fresh and when the Sea falls they become salt The Congolans are naturally very sweet and easie able and strong It s People but dull and idle they will not take the pains to tame Beasts for service nor to employ their fine Stones in Buildings nor make their Birds of Prey for Hawking yet make they curious Cloths Velvets Damasks Brocats c. They have no harmony in their Instruments of Musick but a confused mixture of many cords or strings and many Voices content them their Money is of grey shells taken on the Coast of the Province of Bamba and these Shells especially the Females are much esteemed even in other Kingdoms and almost through all Aethiopia Their Grains Fruits Waters Fowl It s Fertility Sea and River Fish are excellent They have store of Elephants Mines of Silver Iron Chrystal Marble Jaspar Porphyre c. They know not their Histories but by the Reigns of their Kings and without specifying the time for they have no Letters much less Learning and hereupon some would make us believe that Emanuel of Portugal having sent a famous Ambassador into Congo with many Presents among others three fair Books excellently bound and which contained the Cannons the Laws Imperial the Ordinances Civil Right the Infortiate the Rubricks c. and with these Books many Doctors of Law to teach the knowledge of them and when the King of Congo did understand the subject that these fair Books contained and knew the profession of the Doctors he was so surprized that he remained sometime silent but in the end he caused these Books to be burned saying That he feared they would overihrow the very foundation of his Estate and that he contented himself to judge according to reason and need no other Interpreter than Common sense but withal protesting that he would remain a good and intire Friend to Emanuel King of Portugal and so sent back his Doctors The Author of the Essay of the Wonders of Nature applies this story to the King of the Abyssins It is much at one let us return to Congo They say that the Province of Bamba can furnish at a need 400000 strong and Warlike men the other Provinces are no less nor possibly worse peopled than this but less addicted to Arms. This being esteemed the Bulwark of the Kingdom affected to the service of their Prince and so strong that at one blow of a Sword they can strike off an Oxes head or cut a Slave in two Their Elephants are so great that some of their Teeth are found to weigh 200 l. and they make such esteem of their Tails when they are old that sometimes they exchange three Slaves for one Tail They make of them divers Ornaments and Cords for their Instruments of Musick The Kingdom falls only to the Males and in default of Legitimates to Bastards to shun all process all Riches belong to the King who disposes of them to whom he pleases keeping to himself a certain Revenue Christianity hath been introduced about 150 years ago but not without much difficulty in its beginning Estate of Cacongo East of Congo and South of Anziquaines is the Estate of CACONGO and South of Cacongo are the Giaques or Jaggas which the Abyssins call Gallas and others Imbagolas These People are Vagabonds Cruel Men-eaters like to the Anziquaines and Moceveies living only on what they steal from their Neighbours The great Jagge disposes absolutely both of their Idolatry and their War Kingdom of Angola The Kingdom of ANGOLA once Abonda is between Congo on the North Mataman on the South Malemba on the East and the Sea on the West This Kingdom hath 100 Leagues of Coast to wit from the 10th unto the 4th degree of Meridional Latitude and that which continues unto Cape Negro and belongs to divers Lords tributary to it The principal City of the Country is Engaze and likewise Dongo which Modern Authors place at the meeting of many Rivers It is 75 or 80 Leagues from the Sea The Mountains of Cambamba rich in Mines of Silver are in this Country which the Portugals cause to be laboured It s other chief places are Massirgan on the River Coanza Benguela seated on the Sea on the Bay of Thora and Quicongo a Sea-Port Town It s Trade Through the whole Country there is a great traffick for Slaves 20 or 25000 yearly being transported from the Port of Loanda There are such multitudes in this Kingdom that the Grand Soba as they say can in a moment raise 100000 Men and that in Anno 1584 he raised 1200000. In Anno 1585 600000. Yet these last were put to flight by 200 Portugals at the head of 10000 Aethiopians